Alcatel Lucent USA CMP-40 Cellular Base Station Transceiver User Manual users manual 2

Alcatel-Lucent USA Inc. Cellular Base Station Transceiver users manual 2

Contents

users manual 2

Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-34 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions 1 N Tx Antenna 12 N Tx Antenna 23 N Tx Antenna 34 N Tx Antenna 45 N Tx Antenna 56 N Tx Antenna 6 RECEIVE 0 ANTENNA INPUTS 0 N Rx 0 Antenna 01 N Rx 0 Antenna 12 N Rx 0 Antenna 23 N Rx 0 Antenna 34 N Rx 0 Antenna 45 N Rx 0 Antenna 56 N Rx 0 Antenna 6RECEIVE 1 ANTENNA INPUTS 0 N Rx 1 Antenna 01 N Rx 1 Antenna 12 N Rx 1 Antenna 23 N Rx 1 Antenna 34 N Rx 1 Antenna 45 N Rx 1 Antenna 56 N Rx 1 Antenna 6†These connectors are not used on the Growth RCF. Table 8-5. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)Connector Identification Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function REFERENCE POWER DIVIDER (1:6) REF(PD30)* COM SMA 15 MHz Reference Input 1 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 1 PD1 2 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 2 PD1 Table 8-4. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)Connector Identification (Contd)Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-35Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions 3 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 3 PD1 4 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 4 PD1 5 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 5 PD1 6 SMA Not Used REFERENCE POWER DIVIDER (1:6) REF(PD30)† COM SMA 15 MHz Reference Input 1 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 0 PD1 2 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 1 PD1 3 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 2 PD1 4 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 3 PD1 5 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 4 PD1 6 SMA 15 MHz to Shelf 5 PD1 * Connections for P-RCF. † Connections for Growth RCF. Table 8-6. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30) Connector Identification Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function TRANSMIT ANTENNAS POWER COMBINERS (9:1) 0 (PD20) J1 SMA Tx Ant 1 Test to Tx SIG MON-0 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 0 1 (PD21) J1 SMA Tx Ant 1 Test to Tx SIG MON-1 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 1 2 (PD22) J1 SMA Tx Ant 2 Test to Tx SIG MON-2 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 2 Table 8-5. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30)Connector Identification (Contd)Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-36 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions3 (PD23) J1 SMA Tx Ant 3 Test to Tx SIG MON-3 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 3 4 (PD24) J1 SMA Tx Ant 4 Test to Tx SIG MON-4 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 4 5 (PD25) J1 SMA Tx Ant 5 Test to Tx SIG MON-5 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 5 6 (PD26) J1 SMA Tx Ant 6 Test to Tx SIG MON-6 J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Tx Output 6 Table 8-7. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,Connector Identification Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function REF TNC 15 MHz Reference Input SET UP 0† N Set Up Antenna (for future use) RTU IN† N Radio Test Unit Input RTU OUT† N Radio Test Unit Output TRANSMIT ANTENNA OUTPUTS 0 N Tx Antenna 01 N Tx Antenna 12 N Tx Antenna 23 N Tx Antenna 34 N Tx Antenna 45 N Tx Antenna 56 N Tx Antenna 6Table 8-6. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30) Connector Identification (Contd)Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-37Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsRECEIVE 0 ANTENNA INPUTS 0 N Rx 0 Antenna 01 N Rx 0 Antenna 12 N Rx 0 Antenna 23 N Rx 0 Antenna 34 N Rx 0 Antenna 45 N Rx 0 Antenna 56 N Rx 0 Antenna 6RECEIVE 1 ANTENNA INPUTS 0 N Rx 1 Antenna 01 N Rx 1 Antenna 12 N Rx 1 Antenna 23 N Rx 1 Antenna 34 N Rx 1 Antenna 45 N Rx 1 Antenna 56 N Rx 1 Antenna 6†These connectors are not used on the Growth RCF. Table 8-8. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)Connector Identification Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function RECEIVE 0 ANTENNAS POWER DIVIDERS (1:9) 0 (PD1) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 0 1 (PD2) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 1 2 (PD3) J1 SMA Not Used Table 8-7. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,Connector Identification (Contd)Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-38 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsJ2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 2 3 (PD4) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 3 4 (PD5) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 4 5 (PD6) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 5 6 (PD7) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 0 Input from 6 Table 8-9. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)Connector Identification Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function RECEIVE 1 ANTENNAS POWER DIVIDERS (1:9) 0 (PD11) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 0 1 (PD12) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 1 2 (PD13) Table 8-8. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)Connector Identification (Contd)Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-39Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Busbar Assembly Unit, KS24355, L1The Cell Site Busbar Assembly Unit utilizes plug-in Circuit Breakers for 5.0 A, 15.0 A, and 25.0 A. It also uses screw-in Capacitors. This unit equips the growth RCF so that it can support 8 EDRUs per shelf.The Growth Channel Frame Hardware is listed in the table below. J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 2 3 (PD14) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 3 4 (PD15) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 4 5 (PD16) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 5 6 (PD17) J1 SMA Not Used J2 thru J10 SMA J11 SMA Rx 1 Input from 6 Note: For other transmit and receive options, refer to SD-2R263-01 (P-RCF) or SD-2R264-01 (Growth RCF).Table 8-9. Radio Channel Frame Interconnection Panel (ED-2R831-30,)Connector Identification (Contd)Jack (Plug) Conn Type Function Table 8-10. Growth Radio Channel Frame (G-RCF) J41660B-2 Hardware Item Max Qty Code EqptLocCable Tray Assembly 1Interconnection Panel 1 ED-2R831-30 Tx, Rx Power Dividers (9:1) 21 KS24235, L5 Tx, Rx Power Dividers (1:6) KS24235, L6
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-40 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsRadio Channel Unit Shelf (Shelf 0-5) 6 ED-2R834-30 13, 21 Transmit Combiner 1 BBN2B+12V Power Converter 1 419AERadio Channel Unit 12 ED-2R836-30 Digital Radio Unit 6 ED-2R920-30 Power Converter Unit 430AB (Req’d for EDRU) Enhanced Digital Radio Unit Maximum 12 per shelf 44WR8Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) 1 TN1713B or TN3500B+5V Converter 1 430AB Receive Switch Divider (Manual) 2 BBN1 *Busbar Assembly Unit(Manufactured 5/98 or later) 2 KS24355, L1 Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 15.0 A 2 KS24356, L6 Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 25.0 A 10 KS24356, L8 Circuit Breaker, Plug-In, 5.0 A 3 KS24356, L4Note: This table is for hardware identification only. Do not use this table for ordering hardware items. * Replaces Circuit Breaker Assembly ED-2R826-30and Capacitor Panel Assembly ED-2R829-30.Table 8-10. Growth Radio Channel Frame (G-RCF) J41660B-2 Hardware Item Max Qty Code EqptLoc
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-41Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Mobile Switching Center (MSC) InterfaceTwo data links provide the control and reporting interface between the Cell Site and Mobile Switching Center (MSC). Either data link can control Cell Site functions through the Radio Control Complex (RCC). Each data link interfaces both of the processors located on the RCC. Only one processor is on-line at a time. The other is in a standby mode, tracking functions being performed by the on-line processor, in the event it is required to come on-line. The on-line processor sends and receives control and data information over the Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up." Functions performed by the Cell Site units are controlled over the TDM bus. The on-line processor also supplies data and control to each of the Radio Channel Unit (RCUs).Series II Cell Site architecture consists of three types of equipment frames:1. Radio Channel Frame (RCF) — Primary and a maximum of two growth frames 2. Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) — Two frames, maximum 3. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) — Two frames, maximum. The P-RCF contains the Radio Channel Complex (RCC) as well as the shelves for individual TDMA radios. The RCC controls the operation of the Cell Site equipment. The LAF provides RF signal combining and amplification equipment, while the AIF houses the Cell Site's reference frequency generator, receiver calibration generator, and the RF filter networks that transport the RF signal to and from the antennas. A Radio Frame Set (RFS) consists of one, two, or three RCFs, all controlled by one RCC. There will be one or two LAFs and one or two AIFs per Cell Site. Note that each of the three RCFs may contain Digital Radio Units (DRUs) or Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs). The DRU or EDRU is the radio unit used with Series II TDMA. The DRU can be configured as a Voice radio (V-DRU) or a Locate radio (L-DRU). One DRU occupies two analog Radio Channel Unit (RCU) slots and provides three Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs). One EDRU occupies a single RCU slot and also provides three DTCs. The EDRU can be configured as a Control/Traffic (C/T-EDRU) or as an L-EDRU. Series II analog hardware frames. DRUs, EDRUs, and the TDMA radio hardware, can reside in the same Series II Cell Site RCFs as the analog 30-kHz RCUs. Hardware wise, converting from Series II Cell Site with analog radios to Series II TDMA radios is quite simple. For Series II TDMA, the plug-in DRUs and EDRUs
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-42 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptionsare added in the existing radio slots in the RFS. Note that it takes two RCU slots for each DRU.However, one DRU using a single carrier frequency supports three channels, while the RCU (analog unit) using a single carrier frequency supports only one channel. Note also, that an EDRU can perform all the same functions, and more, of a DRU and takes up only one RCU slot. DRUs and EDRUs may be added to the Series II Cell Site by replacing existing RCUs with DRUs or EDRUs. Additionally, one TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) and one (analog) Radio Test Unit (RTU) Control Board (see Figure 8-12) are required for each digitally equipped Cell Site. Figure 8-12. Radio Test Unit (RTU) Control Board (AYD8) and Switch Assembly (ED3R026-30) LocationThe Series II Cell Site is based on a modular architecture. It includes controllers, radios, wideband linear amplifiers, antennas, and associated equipment for REAR VIEWEQL 012EQL 162EQL 012EQL 162RCU/DRUREF FREQ.RTUSWITCHRCUTRANSMITRCUREF.FREQ.RCUREC1RCUREC0LEVEL 30(SHELF 30LEVEL 21(SHELF 4)RTUCONTROLBOARDRTN+V 123444RTN+V 1 2 3
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-43Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptionssetting up and completing cellular calls. It can support AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA simultaneously through the same wideband linear amplifier and antennas.The AMPS radio consists of a single plug-in unit—the radio channel unit (RCU) or the single-board RCU (SBRCU); either unit occupies one RCU slot. (The RCU consists of two circuit boards, and the SBRCU consists of a single circuit board. The RCU faceplate is wider than the SBRCU faceplate.) Similarly, the TDMA radio consists of a single plug-in unit, the digital radio unit (DRU) or the enhanced digital radio unit (EDRU); the DRU occupies two adjoining RCU slots, and the EDRU occupies one RCU slot. In contrast, the CDMA radio consists of an entire shelf of plug-in units.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-44 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF)The major units of the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) are listed below and described in the paragraphs that follow: ■Frame Interface Assembly (FIA) ■Linearizer Unit (LZR) ■Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU). The Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) is designated as J41660C-1, C-2. All Cell Sites have at least one LAF with at least one Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC). Two different (M)LACs are available depending on the output power needed. They are:1. 100-Watt (M)LAC uses 10 Linear Amplifier Modules (LAMs).2. 240-Watt (M)LAC uses 20 LAMs.Three additional LACs may be configured as needed. A fully loaded LAF (LAF 0) may contain up to four LACs. An additional LAF, may be added and may be equipped with up to three LACs..Table 8-11. Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) Hardware Item MaxQty Code EqptLoc Linear Amplifier Frame 0 (Primary) 1 J41660C-1, C-2Sniffer Combiner (For CDPD) 1 KS21604, L22A Frame Interface Assembly 1 ED-2R838-30 70Box Fan 2 WP92103, L1 Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) J-41660CA-2, L6 (Full)Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) J-41660CA-2, L5 (Half)Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC) J-41660CA-3RF Amplifier 1 KS23757, L1 Fan Blower 1 WP92104, L1 Linear Amplifier Module‡ 10 or20 ED-2R840-30* Up to three additional LACs can be provided in LAF 1.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-45Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-13. Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (J41660C-1)LEVEL28LEVEL10FRONT VIEWSIDE VIEWLINEARIZERLINEARIZERAMPLIFIERLINEARFRAMEINTERFACEASSEMBLYAMPLIFIERLINEARLEVEL19LEVEL54LEVEL70UNITUNIT
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-46 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-14. Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) (Doors Removed) Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Circuit J41660CA-1The Linear Amplifier Unit (ED-2R839-30) and the Linearizer Unit (ED-2R841-30) make up a Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) (see Figure 8-15). Up to four LACs may be used. The Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) has either 10 or 20 pie-shaped Linear Amplifier Modules (ED-2R840-30) operating in parallel. When all Linear Amplifier Modules (LAMs) are equipped, the maximum average output power is 240 watts. LINEARAMPLIFIER20102010UNIT (LAU)SWITCH(SET TO 10FOR 10 LAMs,SET TO 20FOR 20 LAMs)LINEAR AMPLIFIERFRAME (LAF)LINEARIZER (LZR)(COVER REMOVED)CONVERSION RECORD#LAM DATE CONVERTED102010LABEL (MARK DATECONVERTED TO 10 LAMOR 20 LAM LAC)LINEAR AMPLIFIERCIRCUIT (LAC)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-47Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsThe LAU has a power distribution board (AYM1), a 24-volt power filter, a cooling fan, and a temperature sensor. The output from the LAU is applied to the antenna interface frame. A splitter combiner assembly is also part of the LAU. The term Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) (see Figure 8-16) is used to include all major functional parts of the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF). The LAC provides high power amplification of many transmit signals and controls the intermodulation distortion. The LAC consists of the following: ■Combiner-Preamplifier Circuit ■Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) ■Linearizer (LZR). Transmit signals originating at the RCF(s) are combined and amplified to a level suitable for driving the input of the LZR. The LZR uses feed-forward, pre-distortion, and amplification of the input signal to cancel distortion and provides a level necessary for driving the LAU. The LZR provides continuous control of gain and phase to provide maximum distortion reduction. It also provides fault detection, power distribution, and overload protection for the LAC. The LAU consists of 10 or 20 LAMs arranged in parallel, a splitter-combiner network, and a power distribution board. It amplifies the input signal to an output level of 240 watts when fully configured with 20 LAMs (approximately 120 watts when equipped with 10 LAMs). The +24 volt DC from the Cell Site power plant is applied to the filter capacitor bank in the FIA. From here, power feeders 0 through 3 supply +24 volt DC to the LAU and power feeder 4 supplies +24 volt DC to the LZR fan and to the Power Fault Monitor (PFM) board inside the LZR.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-48 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-15. Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC), Front ViewThe PFM board supplies +24 volt DC to the fan in the LAU; it also converts the +24 volt DC to +5 and ±15 volt DC and applies these to the LAU. YF4
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-49Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsThe PFM board distributes the gain and phase adjustment signals between various circuit boards in the LZR. It also monitors the fault status of the fans, LAMs, and the LZR internal circuits. The fault status is processed and passed to the AFI board in RCF0. When a critical fault condition occurs (for example, high temperature), the +5 volt bias to the LAU shuts down. This turns the LAU off and takes that particular LAC out of service. The fault condition continues to be monitored and the LAC put back into service automatically if the condition is cleared. The PFM board also measures a portion of the LAC Radio Frequency (RF) output signal level (TX signal loop 2). If the measurement is too high, the PFM sends an attenuator control signal to the attenuator in the preamplifier to lower its gain. Transmit signals from the RCF(s) are connected to one or more of the three inputs of the 3:1 power combiner located in the FIA. Each input has an adjustable attenuator for equalizing the RF path loss between the RCF(s) and the LAC combiner input. The combiner output is connected to the input of the preamplifier where the signal is amplified by 40 to 50 dB. The preamplifier has an externally accessible gain control for setting the preamplifier gain, hence, the desired LAC output power. It also can lower the gain from its set value through a feedback control from the PFM. The preamplifier has two amplifiers connected in parallel so that a failure within the preamplifier will not shut down the whole LAC. The output of the two amplifiers is continuously monitored by the PFM board, and a failure of one is indicated by an LED on the PFM. The output of the preamplifier is applied to and distortion correction circuits in the LZR. The RF output from the LZR is applied to the LAMs in the LAU, where it is amplified and applied through 50-dB coupler CP1 and high-power delay line DL2 to 10/50-dB coupler CP2 in the LZR. The 10-dB portion of CP2 is used to inject the distortion correction signal into the main path, while the 50-dB portion is used to couple off a signal for loop 2. The output of CP2 is coupled to circulator HY1, which sends the RF signal to the AIF and also sends a reflected TX (Transmit) signal back to the LZR.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-50 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-16. LAC Functional DiagramLinear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) DrawingsThe following list provides the Drawing code numbers for the Linear Amplifier hardware: LZRP/OCP2 HY1DL2CPIRCUsTO LAC (1, 2, 3)LINEAR AMPLIFIER UNIT+15V+5VFRAMEINTERFACEANTENNARF OUT TOLOOP 1DELAYTX SIGNAL(LAU)AMPLINEARMODULE STATUSTEMP. ALARMFAN ALARM+24V FANLZR OUTFDR 4FDR 3FDR 2FDR 1P/OBOARDFITSALARM/TO/FROMFROMLAF ALARM STATUS+24 PWR 1CONTROLATTENUATOR+24 PWR 0LZR INRFSUPPLY+24V DCCELLSITEFROMFDR 0PREAMPATTEN./3:1COMBINERPOWERBANKCAPACITORFILTER(FIA)P/O FRAME INTERFACE ASSEMBLYLINEAR AMPLIFIER CIRCUITLAF ALARM STATUS REQUEST(LZR)UNITLINEARIZERTX SIGNAL LOOP 2REFLECTED TX SIGNALIDM CORRECTION SIGNALCode Number LAC DrawingSD2R265-01 Linear Amplifier Circuit SD2R266-01 Linear Amplifier Frame SD2R271-01 Series II Cell Site J41660C Linear Amplifier Frame J41660CA Linear Amplifier Circuit ED2R839-30 Linear Amplifier Unit ED2R840-30 Linear Amplifier Module ED2R841-30 Linearizer Unit.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-51Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site, Differences Between A/B-Series and C-Series Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs) 0This section describes the differences in alarm reporting between A/B-Series and C-Series Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs). A description of LAC LED indicators (See Table 8-12, and Table 8-13) and field replaceable fuses is also provided. C-Series LACs provide improved power circuitry and alarm indications. C-Series LACs are most easily distinguishable from A/B-Series LACs by the presence of the 10/20 LAM Switch on the circular power distribution (AYM) board on the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU).For additional information, consult Lucent Technologies Customer Information Bulletin 196A, "Improved "C" Linear Amplifier Circuit Features." Table 8-12. Linear Amplifier Frame / Linear Amplifier Circuit (J41660CA-1) Controls and Indicators Circuit Control/ Pack Indicator Type Function Linear Amplifier Unit ED-2R839-30 AYM3 DS1-DS20 LED (Red) Indicates +24-volt power failure to the associated Linear Amplifier Module. Linearizer ED-2R841-30 AYE1 SW1 Sets address of the LAC. SW2 Factory/field switch. SW3 SW4 Supplies pilot signal to the Gain Phase Adjuster AYF1.AYG1 STATUS Input Drive LED (Red) Indicates a problem with the RF input. Fans LED (Red) Indicates a fan failure. Preamplifier LED (Red) Indicates one or both input preamplifiers have failed. Linear Amplifier Unit LED (Red) Indicates a fan failure, high tempera-ture, or LAM failures in the LAU. Linearizer LED (Red) Indicates a fan failure, power supply failure, or excessive intermodulation distortion in the Linearizer.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-52 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Module ED-2R840-30The Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) is capable of handling 20 Linear Amplifier Modules (LAMs) (See Figure 8-17). Two sets of 10 modules must be used — one set may be non-amplifying modules.Table 8-13. Linear Amplifier Frame / Linear Amplifier Circuit (J41660CA-1) Fuses Fuse Designation Voltage Supplied To Circuit Location LINEAR AMPLIFIER UNIT FAN F9, 5A, +24V Fan B2 in the LAU by Temp. Sensor EAP1 and filter FL1 19, 54 PREAMPLIFIER F10, 2A, +24V F11, 2A, +24V Attenuator Preamplifier PA1 in the Linearizer 10, 28 LINEARIZER FAN F12, 3A, +24V Fan B1 in the Linearizer by TB1 10, 28 FCA F13, 10A, +24V AYH2 board in the Linearizer 10, 28
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-53Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Figure 8-17. Linear Amplifier Module (LAM)Series II Cell Site Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU)The Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) (see Figure 8-18) receives the Radio Frequency (RF) output from the linearizer unit (LZR) and applies it to an Linear Amplifier Module (LAM) where it is amplified and then processed out to the Antenna
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-54 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsInterface Frame (AIF). The LAU also contains a cooling fan and a temperature sensor (overheat sensor). Figure 8-18. Linear Amplifier Unit ED-2R839-30 MODULE ED-2R840-30LINEAR AMPLIFIERFANPRINTED WIRINGFRONT VIEWBOARD AYM3
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-55Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-19. Location of LAM Fuses, LEDs, and the 10/20 Switch (on C-Series LACs) Series II Cell Site, 20-LAM LAC Versus 10-LAM LACWhen Linear Amplifier Circuits (LACs) are shipped from the factory, they are configured as full-power (20-LAM) LACs (see Figure 8-19). If they are to be installed as low-power (10-LAM) LACs, an in-line SMA attenuator must be installed in Series with a coaxial cable in the Linearizer (LZR) and, on C-Series LACs, the 10/20 switch on the front of the circuit AYM board must be changed to the 10 position. To change back to a 20-LAM LAC, the in-line attenuator must be removed and the switch returned to the 20 position. A label (CONVERSION RECORD) is provided on the front face of the Linearizer cabinet on C-Series LACs and should be marked with the date of any 10/20 conversion. A suitable label should also be placed on any A/B-Series LACs which are converted. NOTE:Any new C-Series LACs shipped from the factory as replacements will not have attenuators. The attenuators may be obtained from Lucent Technologies as a spare part, Comcode 406825794 or 406822064. Any LAMLEDs10/20SWITCHLAMFUSES
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-56 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptionsnew C-Series, half-power LACs ordered will have the attenuator shipped loose as part of J41660CA-1, List 3 or J41660CA-2, List 4.Series II Cell Site Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30The Linearizer unit (LZR) (see Figure 8-20, and Figure 8-23) is located in a shelf below each Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU). The LZR contains circuits that function to reduce intermodulation distortion. The LZR contains a power fault monitor board. This board monitors faults and sends alarms back to the Radio Control Frame (RCF). The Linearizer Unit (LZR) receives the combined Radio Frequency (RF) input from the Frame Interface Assembly (FIA) and functions to reduce the intermodulation distortion prior to applying the RF input to the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU). The LZR also has circuits to monitor alarm conditions on the Linear Amplifier (LAF).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-57Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Figure 8-20. Linearizer (LZR) Unit ED-2R841-30BOARD (PRE-DISTORTIONAYH1 PRINTED WIRINGJ44DELAY LINEWP-92068, L2(FACEPLATE REMOVED FOR CLARITY)FANBASELINEARIZERPART OF KIT,LINEARIZERPART OF KIT,DIRECTIONAL COUPLERAMPLIFIER (FCA))(FINAL CORRECTIONAYH2 PRINTED WIRING BOARDDRIVER (PDD))846492015846531754BRACKET, FAN846491843846531754CIRCULATORWP-92702, L1KS-21603, L5FRONT VIEWJ32J48FLOWAIRJ42FRONT VIEWADJUSTER 2 (GPA2))PWB (GAIN PHASEAYF2105517155PIN, DESIGNATIONKS-14174,L ( )
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-58 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-21. Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30TOP VIEWHY1CP2J49J32J41J52J4J25J35P11P15J5J44J36-10 -50AYF1 PRINTED WIRINGBOARD (GAIN PHASEADJUSTER 1 (GPA1))AYE1 PRINTED WIRINGBOARD (CONTROLLER/ANALYZER BOARD (CAB))AYE2 PRINTED WIRINGBOARD (RF POWERSENSOR (RPS))AYG1 PRINTED WIRINGBOARD (POWER FAULTMONITOR (PFM))
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-59Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-22. Linearizer Unit ED-2R841-30J31J51J50J46J37J38J47J45BOTTOM VIEWJ3J6J2J1J9J7J8J10P14REAR VIEWP1J33P13
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-60 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-23. Linearizer Faceplate with the Front Grille RemovedPlease refer to Lucent Technologies Practice 401-660-125 for a full description of the Modular Linear Amplifier Circuit (MLAC) J-41660CA-3.INPUT DRIVEANTENNAPRE-AMPLIFIERLINEARIZERINPUT DRIVEFANSFCASTATUSLINEARIZERFANLINEARAMPLIFIERUNITFANPREAMPLIFIERSTATUSLINEARIZERFANLINEARAMPLIFIERUNITFANPREAMPLIFIERPRE-AMPLIFIERLINEARIZER10A24V3A24V2A24V2A24V5A24VLINEARAMPLIFIERUNITLINEARAMPLIFIERUNIT
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-61Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30The frame interface assembly contains the connectors used to interface the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) with the power plant and Radio Channel Frames (RCFs). Also, this assembly contains 20 capacitors used to filter the +24 volt supply.The Frame Interface Assembly (FIA) (see Figure 8-24) contains a bank of filter capacitors used to filter the DC voltage applied to the Linearizer unit (LZR) and the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU). In addition, the FIA combines the Radio Frequency (RF) inputs from the Radio Channel Frames (RCFs) through a 3:1 power combiner and applies the combined RF output to an attenuator/preamplifier. The output of this attenuator/preamplifier is adjusted as required and applied to the LZR. Also, Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) alarm status request and alarms pass through the FIA.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-62 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions. Figure 8-24. Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30(DOOR, HINGES, CABLE DUCT & BRACKET, CONNECTOR REMOVED)TOP VIEWC3C4C5C13C14C15C18C19C20C8C9C10LAC 6LAC 2 LAC 3 LAC 5LAC 1LAC 4LAC 0EFERENCE ONLYHOWN FOR/O J41660CA-1OUTLETP3LAC 6LAC 2PA1P4LAC 3PD1PA1PA1LAC 5LAC 1P2LAC 4LAC 0P1INLETAIRPD1(LAC 4)(LAC 0)(LAC 6)(LAC 2)AIRPD1(LAC 5)(LAC 1)PD1PA1(LAC 3)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-63Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-25. Frame Interface Assembly ED-2R838-30REAR VIEWLAC 3P4LAC 6LAC 2P3LAC 4LAC 0P1LAC 5LAC 1P2TB1C1C20C8C9C10C19C18C5C15C4C14C7C6 C11C16C17 C2C3C13C12ED2R83B-30J2J1BOTTOM VIEW (CABLE DUCT REMOVED)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-64 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Antenna Interface Frame (AIF), OverviewThe major hardware units on the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) are listed below and are described functionally in the following paragraphs. ■Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel ■Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) ■Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch ■Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) ■Receive Filter Panel (RFP) ■Transmit Filter Panel. Figure 8-26. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional DiagramThe Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) has two configurations—a primary frame (J41660E-2) and a growth frame (J41660F-2). The Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) provides the interface and signal filtering circuitry required to complete the REF FREQ GENRCVR CAL GENRTU Switch PanelRCFLAC 3RCFRCFLAC 2RCFRCFLAC 1RCFRCFLAC 0RCFRCCPRIMARY—AIF0ALARMSGROWTH—AIF1RCF15 MHzRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRCFLAC 6RCFRCFLAC 5RCFRCFLAC 4RCFRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXFIFALARMSANT 0ANT 1 ANT 5ANT 3ANT 2 ANT 6ANT 4RTU/TRTU/CRTU
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-65Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsCell Site Receive (RX) and Transmit (TX) RF paths from the RX and TX antennas to the LAFs and Radio Channel Unit (RCUs) inside the RCFs. This is accomplished through the TX and RX filter panels (TFPs and RFPs) in the AIF. In addition to the Radio Frequency (RF) filtering and interface circuitry, the AIF contains the test circuitry required for radio diagnostics. A test switch matrix is used to establish the required test paths. A Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) is used to set a known level for RX path loss calibration. The AIF also contains a highly accurate Cell Site Reference Frequency Generator. The major assemblies making up each configuration are listed and described below. Note that a duplexer filter panel is available to replace the separate receive and transmit filter panels. The duplexer filter panel has one configuration for the “A” band and another for the “B” band.Figure 8-27. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional ArchitectureRECEIVE FILTER PANELTRANSMIT FILTER PANELANTENNASTOCABLESFEEDERCOAXFRAME(S)AMPLIFIERLINEARTOTRANSMIT RFTORECEIVE FILTER PANELRECEIVE FILTER PANELRECEIVE FILTER PANELTRANSMIT FILTER PANELCALIBRATION GENERATORTEST SWITCH MATRIXREF FREQ GENERATORPOWER/ALARMRECEIVE RFRF TESTREFERENCEALARMSSETFRAMECHANNELRADIO
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-66 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Figure 8-28. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional DiagramSH 1FROMFROMRCF0FUTURECONTROLANTENNAMONITORRCF0TOMONITOR543RTU TX J1FROM OTHERFROM OTHER7:11:21:2XMTRPOWER ANDTX-ANTSWITCH PANEL (RSP)RTUJ4J2J3RTU RXTRANSMITTO OTHER DIV0P11:71:7876P2DIV1DIV0TOTO OTHER DIV1TO OTHER DIV1RFP’s (-50 dB PORT)RX-ANTRCVRRX-ANTRCVRAPPLICATIONSAIF0DFP’sORRFP’sOTHERFROM1:61:61:61:6RFP’s (-40 dB PORT)TO R1FP0 (-40 dB PORT), SH 3TO R1FP0 (-50 dB PORT), SH 3SH 3RFP’s (-40 dB PORT)RFP’s (-50 dB PORT)OR DFP0 (PD2-J3)TO R0FP0 (-40 dB PORT)OR DFP’S (PD2-J2)FROMSH 3FROMSH 3FROMTO R0FP0 (-50 dB PORT)FROMR1FP0AIF0FROM 109RAP1:61:61:6DFP0R0FP0 ORFROM AIF0SH 3TOSH 3OR DFP0 (PD1-J3)OR DFP’s (PD2-J2)OR DFP’s (PD1-J2)TFP’s (-40 dB PORT)TFP’s (-50 dB PORT)TO OTHER DIV0OR DFP0 (PD2-J2)OR DFP0 (PD1-J2)FROM TFP0 (-40 dB PORT)FROM TFP0 (-50 dB PORT) SH 31:6OR DFP’s (PD1-J3)RTU-S RAP
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-67Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Figure 8-29. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Functional Diagram1FROM RCG278(SH 2)+24VJ3(SH 1)-50 dB-40 dB10FROMRECEIVECP1(SH 2)TO RAPCP2BPFFL1R1FP0RECEIVE FILTER PANELJ4ANTENNAFROM RCG +24V536(SH 1)(SH 2)TO/FROM RSP49J3PD1J3J21:2J3(SH 2)TO RAPCP2BPFFL1J21:2PD2-50 dB-40 dBANTENNA LAC0FROMBPFFL3DUPLEXERTRANSMIT/RECEIVECP3J4TO COMBINEDDFP0TRANSMITTO FROM(NON-DUPLEXER)CP3TFP0TRANSMIT FILTER PANEL 0J4ANTENNA4FROMFROM RSP3CP1LINEAR AMPLIFIERFL3-40 dBTO RSP(SH 2)CIRCUIT 0BPF (LAC0)-50 dB(SH 1)(SH 2)DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL(DUPLEXER)TYPICAL FILTER PANEL SET+24V6RECEIVE J4ANTENNAFROMRECEIVE8J4ANTENNAFROM RSP57CP1-40 dBFROM RCGJ32-50 dB(SH 2)-40 dBFROM RSPBPFFL1BPF-50 dBFL1HY1R0FP0 (A BAND)RECEIVE FILTER PANEL, DIV0(SH 2)(SH 2)TO RAP+24V10FROM RCG(SH 1)R1FP0 (B BAND)NOTCHFL2 CP2RECEIVE FILTER PANEL, DIV1FL2NOTCHJ31CP250TO RAP9
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-68 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-30. Antenna Interface Growth Frame (AIF) Functional DiagramRCF(s)DIV1 PREAMP POWERAIF1DFP’sORRFP’sFROM1:61:61:61:6OUTPUTSAIF1(RP)DISTRIBUTIONRECEIVE AND POWERAIF1 PREAMPSTO+24V FEEDERSDIV0 PREAMP POWERIF0ROMEEDERS24VTO1:61:6
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-69Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) ShelfThe Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) provides a 15-MHz precision reference frequency at a level of +12 dBm ±2 dB. The 15-MHz signal is used as a reference frequency by the Radio Channel Units (RCUs) and the Radio Test Unit (RTU) to produce the desired output frequency. The oscillator circuit is monitored for and indicates when a fault has occurred. When the RFG shelf supports two oscillators, only one oscillator is on line at a time as indicated by Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).There are three options available for the RFG shelf, as follows:1. RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator.2. RFG shelf with two (2) Rubidium oscillators.3. RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator and one (1) crystal oscillator.Series II Cell Site Receiver Calibration Generator ED-2R845-30This unit generates the Radio Frequency (RF) test signals used in calibrating the RF path loss within the Cell Site.The Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) provides a stable unmodulated calibration signal on Mobile Transmit channel 990. The RCG has a total of 16 Radio Frequency (RF) ports (only 14 are used). These ports are coupled to the inputs of the preamplifiers in the receive paths inside the AIF through 20-dB directional couplers. The calibration signal is used by each Radio Channel Unit (RCU to determine a correction factor required for its Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) output. The correction factor is used to compensate for non frequency dependent losses in each RCU receive path. The stability of the RCG output frequency is the same as that of the 15-MHz reference frequency. The RCG output frequency is factory preset to channel 990—824.01 MHz. The nominal output power level of each of the 16 RCG ports is -58 dBm ±1.5 dB. There are four translations entries which affect Receiver Calibration. ■Frequency (Found in the Cell Form) ■Tolerance (Also found in the Cell Form) ■Receive Signal Strength Calibration Diversity 0 (Referred to as the Expected Value, found in the CEQFACE form) ■Receive Signal Strength Diversity 1 (Referred to as the Expected Value, also found in the CEQFACE form). The RCUs must be reset before these parameters will have an effect. The Receive Signal Strength Calibration parameters for diversity 0 and 1 apply to each face. Changing either of these parameters will only affect the RCUs on that face.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-70 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsDuring an RCU restore sequence, the data decoder tunes to the calibration channel (990) and makes signal strength measurements for each antenna diversity. As a result of these measurements, one of the following three things happens:■If the measurement falls within the tolerance value but is not exactly the same as the expected value, the decoder records the difference between the expected value and the actual measurement. Subsequent measurements made by that radio are adjusted by this value. ■If any of the measurements fall outside of tolerance, no corrections are made to the measured signal strengths. Also, a Receiver Calibration HEH Error message is printed out on the receive-only printer (ROP). ■If the measured value is the same as the expected value, no adjustments are made. Receiver calibration errors can be the result of incorrect translations, defective RF cabling, faulty RCUs, defective preamps, or basically any problem found between the RCG and the RCUs. There are two AIF models—AIF0 (primary) and AIF1 (growth). AIF0 contains a Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel (RAP), an RFG, an RCG, and a Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP). AIF0 can be equipped with one to four sets of filter panels (a single set consists of one TX and two RX filter panels unless it is duplexed). AIF1 Frame 0AIF1 serves as an auxiliary frame to accommodate additional filter panels. It contains a Receive and Power (RP) Distribution Panel and can be equipped with one to three additional filter panel sets. Integrated Duplexer Filter Panels (DFPs) are optional. When equipped, a DFP assembly can be used to combine a TX filter panel with an RX filter panel and share one combined RX/TX antenna port, thus reducing the required number of antennas from three to two per antenna face. Unless otherwise specified, a DFP combines the RX DIV0 path with the TX path. AIF0 combined with AIF1 accommodates up to seven antenna faces, typically consisting of seven TX paths and 14 RX paths. Each antenna face requires an RX filter for the diversity 0 (DIV0) RX path, a TX filter for the TX path, and an RX filter for the diversity 1 (DIV1) RX path. There are some interframe connections between AIF0 and AIF1 to provide the following circuit functions. The RSP in AIF0 switches test signals from the RTU (located in the P-RCF) to and from various RX and TX paths of both AIF0 and AIF1 for system diagnostics. The RAP panel in AIF0 connects the +24 volt DC power supplies to all of the preamplifiers inside the Receiver Filter Panels (RFPs)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-71Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptionsor DFP(s) of both AIF0 and AIF1. The RCG in AIF0 provides a leveled signal to calibrate all of the RX paths from the AIF equipment all the way to the inputs of the RCUs. There are RF connections from AIF0 to the RCF(s), the LAF(s), the RX antennas and the TX antennas.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-72 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-31. Primary Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) J41660E-2DUPLEXER FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELDUPLEXER FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELABINETRECEIVESECTIONTRANSMITSECTIONRECEIVE FILTER PANELRADIO TEST UNITRECEIVE, ALARM & POWERDISTRIBUTION PANELREFERENCE FREQUENCYRECEIVER CALIBRATIONDUPLEXERFILTERPANELD-2R820-30DUPLEXER FILTERGENERATOR GENERATOR SWITCH PRIMARY FRAME - WITH DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-73Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Figure 8-32. Primary Antenna Interface Frame J41660E-2PANELPANELRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELPANELRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERPANELD-2R820-30ABINETPANELRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERRADIO TEST UNITRECEIVE FILTERRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERREFERENCE FREQUENCYRECEIVER CALIBRATIONRECEIVE, ALARM & POWERDISTRIBUTION PANELGENERATORGENERATORSWITCHPANELPANELPANELPRIMARY FRAME - WITHOUT DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-74 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsFigure 8-33. Growth Antenna Interface Frame J41660F -2DUPLEXER FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELDUPLEXER FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERD-2R820-30ABINETPANELRECEIVESECTIONTRANSMITSECTIONRECEIVE FILTER PANELDISTRIBUTION PANELDUPLEXERFILTERPANELPOWER ANDSECONDARY FRAME-WITH DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-75Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Figure 8-34. Growth Antenna Interface Frame J41660F-2PANELPANELRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERPANELPANELRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERPANELRECEIVE FILTERED-2R820-30CABINETRECEIVE FILTERTRANSMIT FILTERRECEIVE FILTERDISTRIBUTION PANELRECEIVE AND POWERPANEL PANEL PANEL SECONDARY FRAME-WITHOUT DUPLEXER FILTER PANEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-76 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Radio Switch PanelSeries II Cell Site Radio Test Unit (RTU) Switch PanelThis switch panel establishes the functional Radio Frequency (RF) test path used by the Radio Test Unit (RTU) during diagnostic testing. These paths include the following:■Receiver-Forward Signal Injection■Receiver-Reflected Signal Injection■Transmit-Forward Signal Measurement■Transmit-Reflected Signal Measurement.The test paths are made through directional couplers containing forward and reflected ports. Under software control, the RTU switch establishes the required paths to test all major functional operations.The Radio Switch Panel (RSP) provides the RTU (located in RCF0) access to the Cell Site Rx and Tx (Receive and Transmit) paths through a test matrix Radio Frequency (RF) distribution network. The RTU is coupled to the incident and reflected path of every antenna used by the Cell Site through the RSP. RF test signals to and from the RTU test receiver and the transmitter are connected to the RSP. The RSP receives logic control signals from the RTU to switch the RF test signals from the RTU to the Rx and Tx paths under test. The RTU is used primarily to verify the Rx and Tx paths to and from the transmit and receive antennas of the Cell Site. The RTU contains a test receiver and test generator which serve to simulate a subscriber unit. The test receiver and the test generator can be tuned to any channel. Tuning is accomplished with commands sent over the TDM bus to an Rx/Tx frequency synthesizer within the RTU. The RTU controls the RF switches located in the RSP. The TDM bus is always installed "red stripe up."During Rx testing on a Cell Site Radio Channel Unit (RCU), the test generator within the RTU is tuned to the channel under test, and the output of the test generator is applied to the appropriate Cell Site receiving antenna. Control is applied to the RSP in AIF0 to select Omni Rx or one face of the directional antenna. RCU transmitter testing is accomplished by connecting the test receiver to the appropriate Tx path and tuning the RTU to the channel under test. Series II Cell Site Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel ED 2R851-30This panel provides an interface between the primary Antenna Interface Frame, AIF0, and other Cell Site equipment for distributing the receive signals, the alarm and control signals, and the +24-volt DC power. The +24-volt DC for the growth AIF1 is supplied from this panel.The Receive, Alarm, and Power (RAP) distribution panel contains the circuit breakers that feed +24 volts to units on the primary Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) and to the growth frame. This panel also contains power dividers used to distribute
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-77Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptionsreceived Radio Frequency (RF) to the Radio Channel Frame (RCF) and alarm tie-points for customer alarms. These alarms are fed back to the Alarm/FITS (Factory Installation Test Set) board located on the P-RCF. The +24 volt DC power from the power plant is applied as FDR0 through CB1 to the RFG, through CB4 to the Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG), and through CB5 to all of the preamplifiers inside the DIV0 Rx filter panels of both AIF0 and AIF1. FDR1 is applied through CB2 to the RFG, through CB3 to the RSP, and through CB6 to the DIV1 Rx filter panels in both AIF0 and AIF1. The RAP panel provides user alarm connections and alarm signals from the AIFs to the RCF0 alarm circuits. It also provides interface connections between the RTU (inside RCF0) and the RSP (inside AIF0). The antenna select output of the RTU sends logic signals to command the RSP to switch the Radio Frequency (RF) test signals from the RTU to various Rx and Tx (Receive and Transmit) antenna paths under test. The antenna message acknowledge output of the RSP acknowledges the RTU upon successful execution of its commands. Series II Cell Site Receive and Power Distribution Panel ED-2R853-31This panel is located in the growth Antenna Interface Frame, AIF1, and provides an interface between AIF1 and other Cell Site equipment for distributing the receive signals and the +24-volt DC received from AIF0.The outputs of the preamplifiers in the RFPs or DFPs are connected to the respective 1:6 power dividers mounted inside the RAP. The amplified Rx signals are distributed to the RCF(s). All of the unused ports on the 1:6 dividers must be terminated into a 50-ohm resistive load. The Receive and Power (RP) distribution panel distributes the Rx signals and +24 volt DC within AIF1. The outputs of the preamplifiers in the RFPs or DFP(s) are connected to the 1:6 power dividers mounted inside the RP panel. The amplified Rx signals are distributed to the RCF(s) from these power dividers. Series II Cell Site Duplexer Filter Panel ED-2R848-31This filter panel is a combination receive and transmit filter panel with a single Rx/Tx (Receive/Transmit) antenna port. Two configurations of this filter panel are used—one for “A” band and one for “B” band. The group number designates the A or B configuration. One duplexer filter panel is required for each antenna face and one receive filter panel is required for diversity. The Duplexer Filter Panel (DFP) is a combined receive and transmit filter panel. Functionally, the receive and transmit circuits are the same as the separate receive and transmit filter panels, except that it provides a combined Rx/TS (Receive/Transmit) antenna port. This allows the Cell Site to use one less antenna. A separate list number is used to designate use with bands A and B.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-78 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsThe Duplexer Filter Panel (DFP) combines a Tx filter panel with an Rx filter panel and has a single Rx/Tx (Receive/Transmit) antenna port. A duplexing technique is applied, enabling the system to use a combined Rx/Tx antenna configuration that reduces the required number of antennas in each antenna face from three to two. The duplexer steers the Rx signals from the combined Tx/Rx antenna to the input of the BPF in the Rx path and directs the Tx signals from the output of the Tx filter to the Tx/Rx combined antenna port. Unless otherwise specified, the duplexer is normally used to combine the DIV0 Rx path with the Tx path. The connections to the DFP are similar to those of the TFP and RFP, except there is only one antenna port for the combined Tx/Rx antenna function. There is only one dual-port directional coupler (-50 dB and -40 dB) required in the DFP. Two 2:1 combiners are used to provide connections to the RTU for radio test diagnostics. The calibration signal from the Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) is coupled into the Rx path through a 20-dB directional coupler similar to that of the RFP. Series II Cell Site Receive Filter Panel ED-2R846-31This filter panel contains a bandpass and a notch filter, a low-noise receive preamplifier and two couplers used to inject forward and reflected Radio Frequency (RF) test signals. These test signals are used to test the receive path for the Radio Channel Units (RCUs). One filter panel is required for each receive path inside the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) unless a Duplex Filter Panel is used.The Receive Filter Panel (RFP) receives the Radio Frequency (RF) from the receive antennas. The RF is first passed through a coupler where test signals may be injected (forward and reflected). The RF is then passed through a bandpass filter and a notch filter. A second coupler, after the filters, provides an injection point for the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) calibration frequency. The receive RF is then applied through a preamplifier to power dividers for distribution into the RCF. The RFP works on both A and B bands. One Receive Filter Panel (RFP) is required for each receive path inside the AIF unless a Duplexer Filter Panel is used. Typically, each antenna face has two Rx (Receive) paths for diversity 0 and diversity 1. The RFP contains a dual-port (-40 dB and -50 dB) directional coupler, a Band Pass Filter (BPF), a notch filter, a 20-dB directional coupler, and a 44-dB preamplifier. The received Radio Frequency (RF) signal from the Rx antenna is sent through the dual-port directional coupler to the input of the BPF. The -40 dB and -50 dB coupling ports of this coupler provide the RTU access to the Rx path of the AIF for test purposes. The RTU sends and receives test signals through the RSP to these ports in order to test the Rx path for each Radio Channel Unit (RCU) installed in the RCF(s). Received RF signals from the Rx antenna are filtered and amplified by the RFP before entering the RCU. The BPF (which is different for “A” and “B” band customers) provides the required Rx path filtering characteristics. The output of the BPF is followed by a notch filter.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-79Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsThe calibration signal from the Receiver Calibration Generator (RCG) is coupled into the Rx path through the 20-dB directional coupler at the output of the receive filters. The calibration signal provides a means to determine a correction factor for offsetting the difference in the loss tolerances in the different Rx paths of the system. The receive and calibration signals are amplified by the preamplifier inside the RFP and sent to the RAP in AIF0 or the RP in AIF1. A typical AIF0 with four antenna faces has a total of eight RFPs and eight 1:6 power dividers at the RAP, namely Face0 Rx0, Face0 Rx1, Face1 Rx0, Face1 Rx1, Face2 Rx0, Face2 Rx1, Face3 Rx0, and Face3 Rx1. A typical AIF1 with three antenna faces has a total of six RFPs and six 1:6 power dividers at the RP, namely Face4 Rx0, Face4 Rx1, Face5 Rx0, Face5 Rx1, Face6 Rx0, and Face6 Rx1. Each RCF has at least one Rx path connection to one of the six ports of each 1:6 divider. This arrangement enables each RCF to have total access to all of the Rx paths in AIF0 and AIF1. A maximum of six RCFs can be connected to each Rx path to the 1:6 power dividers. Series II Cell Site Transmit Filter Panel ED-2R847-31This filter panel contains a transmit filter and a coupler for picking off a portion of the forward and reflected power. These signals are used during Radio Frequency (RF) diagnostic test.The Transmit Filter Panel (TFP) receives transmitted Radio Frequency (RF) from the LAF and passes it through a transmit filter assembly. The transmitted RF is then fed through a coupler to the transmit antenna. The coupler provides ports for picking off a portion of the forward and reflected RF. One Transmit Filter Panel (TFP) is required for each antenna face. The TFP contains a dual-port (-40 dB and -50 dB) directional coupler and a band pass transmit filter. Tx (Transmit) signals from the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) are amplified by the LAF before reaching the AIF. The Tx signals from the LAF are filtered by the Tx filter inside the TFP before being transmitted out by the Tx antenna. The filtered Tx signal is then sent through the dual-port coupler before going to the Tx antenna. The -40 dB and -50 dB coupling ports of this coupler provide the RTU access to the Tx path of the system for test purposes. The RTU receives test signals through the RSP to these ports in order to test the Tx path for each RCU installed in the RCF(s). The Tx filter separates out the unwanted signals before transmitting to the Tx antenna.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-80 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment Descriptions Table 8-14. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Hardware Item MaxQty Code EqptLoc Antenna Interface Frame 0 1 J41660E-2 Receive, Alarm, and Power Distribution Panel 1 ED-2R851-30 23 Circuit Breakers (CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4) 3A 4 406026401 Circuit Breakers (CB5, CB6) 2.5A 2 406085092 Terminal Strip (TB5, TB6) 2 406131862 Splitter Mounting Kit 2 846441368 Power Divider (1:6) 4 (per kit) KS21604,L12 RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator 407575638 22 RFG shelf with two (2) Rubidium oscillators 407575653 Provides an RFG shelf with one (1) Rubidium oscillator and one (1) crystal oscillator 407575646 Receiver Calibration Generator 1 ED-2R845-30 21 Power Divider 1 WP92070,L2 Signal Generator Circuit Pack 1 ARL3 Attenuator (AT1, AT3) 2 402910467 Attenuator (AT2) 1 402910442 Termination 2 461-1 (meca) RTU Switch Panel 1 ED-2R850-30 20 TCI Circuit Pack 1 BBC1 RCV Circuit Packs 2 BBC2 Receive Filter Panel (“A” Band) ED-2R846-31 Coupler (CP1) 40/50 dB 1 KS21603,L8 Coupler (CP2) 20 dB 1 KS21603,L7 Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1) 1 ED-2R815-30 Notch Receive Filter (FL2) 1 ED-2R816-30 Item MaxQty Code EqptLoc Circulator (HY1) 1 WP92072,L2 Preamp (PA1) 1 KS21583,L3 Adapter 1 406083055 Termination 1 401-1 (meca)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-81Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsReceive Filter Panel (“B” Band) ED-2R846-31 Coupler (CP1) 40/50 dB 1 KS21603,L8 Coupler (CP2) 20 dB 1 KS21603,L7 Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1) 1 ED-2R810-30 Notch Receive Filter (FL2) 1 WP92064,L1 Preamp (PA1) 1 KS21583,L3 Adapter 1 406083055 Transmit Filter Panel (“A” Band; Installer Mounted) ED-2R847-31 Transmit Filter Panel (“B” Band; Installer Mounted) ED-2R847-31 Coupler (CP3) 1 KS21603,L8 Bandpass Filter (“A” Band) 1 ED-2R860-30 Bandpass Filter (“B” Band) 1 ED-2R860-30 Duplex Filter Panel (“A” Band) ED-2R848-30 Coupler (CP2) 1 KS21603,L7 Coupler (CP3) 40/50 dB 1 KS21603,L8 Power Divider/Combiner (PD1, PD2) 2 KS21604,L1 Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1) 1 ED-2R815-30 Notch Receive Filter (FL2) 1 ED-2R816-30 Bandpass Transmit Filter (FL3) 1 ED-2R860-30 Preamp (PA1) 1 KS21583,L3 Circulator (HY1) 1 WP92072,L2 Adapter (ADPTR 1) 1 406083055 Termination (TRM1) 1 401-1 (meca) Duplexer Cable Assembly (DPX1) 1 ED-2R875-30 Duplex Filter Panel (“B” Band) ED-2R848-30 Coupler (CP2) 1 KS21603,L7 Coupler (CP3) 40/50 dB 1 KS21603,L8 Power Divider/Combiner (PD1, PD2) 2 KS21604,L1 Item MaxQty Code EqptLoc Bandpass Receive Filter (FL1) 1 ED-2R810-30 Notch Receive Filter (FL2) 1 WP92064,L1 Bandpass Transmit Filter (FL3) 1 ED-2R860-30 Table 8-14. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Hardware (Contd)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-82 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSpecial Filters 0Outside filters, KS-24020, L3 that were designed and required for the Korean Mobile Telephone (KMT) application can be used as part of the Standard Series II Cell Site AIF0 and AIF1. If KS-24020, L3 is used, then KS-24174, L1 and KS-24022, L2 are not needed.Transmit notch filters KS24234, L1 to L10, which were developed for the Air-to-Ground Telephone (AGT) application, can also be used as part of the Standard Series II Cell Site. These are mounted on a standard 19-inch bay frame external to the AIF and should be grounded appropriately.Preamp (PA1) 1 KS21583,L3 Adapter 1 406083055 Duplexer Cable Assembly 1 ED-2R875-30 * Two terminations are required for a full configuration. Any other configuration requires more than two terminations.Table 8-14. Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) Hardware (Contd)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-83Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site Equipment SummaryTable 8-15 provides a summary of Series II Cell Site Equipment. Table 8-15. SIIe Cell Site, R5.06 or Later Physical - Frames DescriptionP-RCF plus 1 or 2G-RCFs Primary RCF with 1, or 2 Growth Frames1 or 2 LAFs (up to 7 LACs) 1, or 2 Linear Amplifier Frames1 Primary AIF1 Growth AIFRCF Equipage - P-RCF Shelves Same as in Companion TableG-RCF Shelves Standard Series II product with 6 radio shelves Radios Radio Types RCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs Locate 1-RCU, optional growth to a maximum number allowed in standard Series II Setup 1-RCU, optional growth to a maximum number allowed in standard Series II Voice 1-RCU/DRU/EDRU to a maximum allowed in any combination subject to physically available radio slots (depends on Setup RCU and Locate RCU equipage) Test RTU and optional "TRTU" Communications and Clock TDM Buses 1 or 2 DS1 Lines 1 or 2 Data Links 1 or 2 CAT Boards 2 per TDM Bus Configuration Radio Control Complex Redundant Reference Frequency Generator Non-redundant, redundant optional Receiver Calibration Generator Optional Receive Switches Optional Voice Sectorization
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-84 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsSeries II Cell Site, Related DocumentationTable 8-16 below provides a list of supporting documentation. For instructions on how to order this documentation, refer to Lucent Technologies 401-610-000, Customer Documentation Catalog. Voice Omnidirectional and/or 1 to 6 Sectors Setup ConfigurationsConfigurations Omnidirectional or DirectionalAIF Equipage - Filter Panels Simplex or Duplex Translations Developments - SIIe Translator Table 8-15. SIIe Cell Site, R5.06 or Later (Contd)Physical - Frames DescriptionTable 8-16. Series II Cell Site - Related Documentation Document Title Designation Planning Guide 401-610-006 Data Base Update 401-610-036 Input Message Manual 401-610-055 Output Message Manual 401-610-057 System Routine and Corrective Maintenance 401-610-075 ECP/CDN Recovery/Messages Audits Manual 401-610-077 Cell Site Audits Manual 401-610-078 System Recovery 401-610-079 Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment 401-610-120 Service Measurements 401-610-135 Daily Operations 401-610-151 Multiple System Subscriber Administration (MSSA) 401-612-064 Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions 401-660-101 Series I and II Cell Translations Applications Guide 401-660-106 Cellular Operations Systems Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering Users Guide 401-660-108 Series IIm T1/E1 Minicell Description, Operation, and Mainte-nance 401-660-115 AUTOPLEX System Application Schematic SD2R236, Issue 7 Storage Battery Lead-Acid Type Requirements and Procedures 157-601-701 J86928A Power Plant Maintenance 167-609-309
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 8-85Series II Cell Site Equipment DescriptionsJ86928A Power Plant Description 167-609-310 J86928A Power Plant Rectifier Description 167-609-311 Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions 401-660-101 Cell Site Antenna Equipment Installation Planning Guide 401-200-300 System Routine and Corrective Maintenance 401-610-175 Cell Site I/O Manual 401-610-107 Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment 401-610-120 Compact Base Station Description, Operation, and Maintenance 401-660-060 Microcell Implementation, Installation, and Maintenance 401-661-111 Protective Grounding Systems Requirements 802-001-197 Electrical Protection of Radio Stations 876-210-100 Intro to Series II Compact Base Station Customer Information Bulletin (CIB)-182 Introduction to Microcell CIB-191 Radio Channel Frame (Primary) Schematic Drawing SD-2R263 Radio Channel Frame (Growth) Schematic Drawing SD-2R264 Linear Amplifier Circuit Schematic Diagram SD-2R265 Linear Amplifier Frame Schematic Drawing SD-2R266 Antenna Interface Frame Schematic Drawing SD-2R268 Series II Cell Site Schematic Drawing SD-2R271 Table 8-16. Series II Cell Site - Related Documentation (Contd)Document Title Designation
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page8-86 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-19RadiosContents■Contents 9-1■Introduction 9-3■AMPS Radio Units and Personality Types 9-4Radio Channel Unit (RCU) 9-4Voice RCU (V-RCU) 9-5Setup RCU (S-RCU) 9-6Locate RCU (L-RCU) 9-6Radio Test Unit (RTU) 9-7■TDMA Radio Units and Personality Types 9-8Digital Radio Unit (DRU) 9-8Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) 9-8Digital Radio Personality Types 9-8Digital Voice Radio 9-8Digital Control Channel (DCCH) Radio 9-9Digital Beacon Radio 9-9Digital Locate Radio 9-9DRU - Detailed Description 9-10EDRU - Detailed Description 9-11
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosSeries II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Components 9-13Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Interfaces 9-14Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Reliability, Federal Communications Commission (FCC), and Safety Features 9-16DRU/EDRU Power Supply 9-16Directional Setup and Beacon Channels 9-16TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) 9-17Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), Feature IDentification (FID) #2775 9-18Cell Sites that can use the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) 9-18Testing Supported by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) 9-19Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Connectivity 9-19Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Testing of C/T-EDRU, L-EDRU, and DCCH 9-21Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Bit-Error Rate (BER) 9-21Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Power Requirements 9-21MSC and TI OA&M for the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) 9-22■CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types 9-23Pilot/Sync/Access Channel Element (CE) 9-24Page CE 9-24Traffic CE 9-24Orthogonal-channel Noise Simulator CE 9-25
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-3RadiosIntroductionThe RCFs contain slots into which cellular equipment and radios are inserted. The P-RCF contains 4 shelves with 12 slots each and 1 shelf with 8 slots, for a total of 56 slots. Each Growth RCF has 6 shelves of 12 slots each for a total of 72 slots. Altogether, an RFS has 200 equipment/radio slots. Up to two 8-bit TDM buses (TDM bus 0 and TDM bus 1) connect the radio shelves in the primary and Growth RCFs. TDM bus 0 serves 5 radio shelves (56 slots) in the P-RCF and the 4 upper radio shelves (48 slots) in the first Growth RCF for a total of 9 radio shelves (104 slots).TDM bus 1 serves the 2 bottom radio shelves (24 slots) in the first growth frame and the 6 radio shelves (72 slots) in the second growth frame for a total of 8 radio shelves (96 slots). Each of the 3 RCFs of an RFS can contain any combination of the following 3 types of radio units. NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosAMPS Radio Units and Personality TypesRadio Channel Unit (RCU) The RCU is the analog radio used with the Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS) system. The RCU occupies 1 slot on an RCF shelf. 1 RCU provides 1 analog channel. Because an RCU uses a single slot on a radio shelf, an RFS fully-configured with RCUs can house 200 RCUs, including voice, setup, and locate radios, providing 192 analog channels.Figure 9-1. AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesFor the RCU radio type, there is one non-volatile memory (NVM) image file for the setup radio (S-RCU), analog voice radio (V-RCU), and analog locate radio (L-RCU). At initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other specific parameter values to each RCU. There is another NVM image file for the RTU. For the SBRCU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the S-SBRCU, V-SBRCU, and L-SBRCU. As of ECP Release 8.0, the Cell Site software downloads a new NVM image file to the SBRCU, separate and distinct from the NVM image file downloaded to the RCU. The Radio Channel Unit (RCU) is a plug-in module containing all RF, baseband, and control circuitry required to perform setup, locate, or voice channel functions. The RCU function, its operating channel, transmit power level, and other specific parameters are downloaded to each radio at initialization by the Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up." In addition, RCU call-processing algorithms are contained in nonvolatile memory within each unit TECHNOLOGYTYPE:HARDWARETYPE:PERSONALITYTYPE: S-SBRCU V-SBRCU L-SBRCU RTUAMPSS-RCU V-RCU L-RCUSBRCU RTURCUNVM IMAGE NVM IMAGE NVMIMAGE
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-5Radiosand can be updated by the TDM bus, if necessary. The downloadable parameter and nonvolatile memory update features allow remote reconfiguration of the RCU and eliminate the need for many on-site visits. The RCU also contains a Built-In Self Test (BIST) capability and a multifunction front panel display. BIST routines are automatically executed at initialization and the test results reported to the Radio Control Complex (RCC). The display includes channel number, function, transmitter-on, standby, and failure indications. Also, there is a front panel switch which allows the transmitter to be shut off by a technician independent of automatic control command. What follows is a brief description of each AMPS radio personality type: ■Analog voice radio: Performs the analog voice function_carries one over-the-air AMPS call. ■Setup radio: Performs the analog setup function_establishes calls via the analog control channel (ACC) with mobile subscribers using AMPS or IS-54B compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles. ■Analog locate radio: Performs the analog locate function. The Analog locate radio assists with AMPS handoffs by measuring the mobile signal strength and verifying the mobile supervisory audio tone (SAT). Voice RCU (V-RCU)The receiver section of a Voice Radio Channel Units (V-RCUs) receives Radio Frequency (RF) input from the Cell Site receiving antenna (two inputs for diversity). This input can be supplied from omni receiving antennas or from receiving antennas on one of the faces of the directional antennas. The Radio Channel Unit (RCU) receiver passes voice audio into its baseband circuits where it is processed and applied through a trunk back to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The data output from the receiver is applied to its data decoder circuits where it is decoded and applied to the on-line Cell Site processor. Data transmission on the receive voice channel is referred to as reverse blank-and-burst data. During data transmission by the subscriber unit, the voice channel is blanked for a small interval while a burst of data is sent. The voice receivers also play a part in the handoff function by periodically making signal measurements. Voice signals to be transmitted are sent from the MSC by a trunk and applied to the RCU where they are processed and applied to the RCU’s transmitter. The modulated transmitter RF output is applied to the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAF) and then through the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) to the antennas. Data to be transmitted is applied from the on-line Cell Site processor to the data encoder circuits on the RCU where it is formatted and applied to the transmitter for transmission. Transmitter and receiver tuning is accomplished by a synthesizer
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Radioswhich is controlled by a common input. A 15.0-MHz synthesizer reference frequency is applied from the Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) located in the AIF. An RCU or SBRCU having a voice radio personality may also have a beacon radio personality. Thus, an RCU or SBRCU can serve two functions concurrently: (1) carry an over-the-air AMPS call and (2) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff (MAHO) procedure. Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for beacon radios, the dual-personality RCU or SBRCU is ineligible for dynamic power control. Setup RCU (S-RCU)Normally, two Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are designated as Setup Radio Channel Units (S-RCUs). Setup radios perform the receive and transmit functions required to set up a call. Because of the dual function (receiving and transmitting), setup radios provide both paging and accessing functions. Paging refers to the process of calling a cellular subscriber (Cell Site to cellular subscriber). Accessing refers to the process of the cellular subscriber making a call (cellular subscriber to Cell Site). The Radio Frequency (RF) output of the setup radios is amplified by the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) and then fed to the transmit antenna through the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF). With Release 4.3, the Simulcast Setup feature allowed setup radios to transmit signals to all directional voice sectors and receive signals from all directional voice sectors in a Cell Site using a single setup channel frequency. In this configuration, a single setup channel serves the entire Cell Site. This contrasts with directional setup for which each directional voice sector has its own setup channel and its own pair of redundant setup radios. Simulcast setup also contrasts with omnidirectional setup which requires an omnidirectional antenna and associated Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC). Locate RCU (L-RCU)Some Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are designated as "Locate"RCUs (L-RCUs). L-RCUs perform the locate function required to determine if a handoff is needed. Signal measurements are made periodically by the locate receivers within Cell Sites adjacent to the Cell Site serving the subscriber’s unit. When it is determined that an adjacent Cell Site can serve the subscriber better, a handoff is made to that adjacent Cell Site. Any of the RCUs may be designated a locating radio. Frequency control data is applied to the receiver’s frequency synthesizer to tune the locating radio to the channel being monitored. A reference frequency is supplied to the receiver’s synthesizer from the Reference Frequency Generator (RFG) located in the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-7RadiosDiversity receiving antennas are used for all omnidirectional and directional antenna configurations. This means that each Cell Site RCU has two receiving Radio Frequency (RF) inputs, referred to as 0 and 1. Received signals from the Cell Site receiving antennas are applied to the switch/ combiner board in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF). The P-RCF is wired to receive two omni receive inputs and two receive inputs from each directional face. Use of these RF inputs depends upon the antenna configuration options employed at the Cell Site. RF switches within the switch/combiner board provide individual RF selection for each RCU. This means that up to two omni receive inputs or directional receive inputs can be selected and applied to each setup RCU and that the locating RCUs may receive up to either two omni receive inputs or two directional receive inputs from any one of the directional faces. In addition to the switchable antenna configuration provided by the switch/combiner board, a fixed antenna configuration is also used. Radio Test Unit (RTU) The Radio Test Unit (RTU) provides Radio Frequency (RF) testing of all Radio Channel Units (RCU)s. Under software control, diagnostic test paths are established to test and measure all major RF functional operations. The RTU contains a test receiver and test generator which serve to simulate a subscriber’s unit. The test receiver can be tuned to any subscriber’s receive channel, and the test generator can be tuned to any subscriber’s transmit channel. Tuning is accomplished by the RF test frequency control input to a transmit/receive frequency synthesizer within the RTU. The reference frequency, supplied from the internal Reference Frequency Generator (RFG), provides the synthesizer reference. The RTU can be switched into a self-test mode to make a loop-around test. During receiver testing on an RCU, test data is encoded and applied from the RTU. The test generator within the RTU is tuned to the channel under test, and the output of the test generator is applied to the appropriate Cell Site receiving antenna’s directional coupler. Control is applied to the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) in the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) to select the correct antenna. The test generator can inject the test signal (as selected by the RTU) into either the forward or reflected port of a directional coupler associated with the RCU under test. Test data injected into the reflected port of the directional coupler is seen by the receiver under test as a normal incoming signal. The receive signal and data are evaluated and the results sent to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). Test signals injected into the forward port of the directional coupler are seen by the receiver under test as a reflected input. Receiving antenna efficiency can be measured by comparing (obtaining a ratio of) receive signal strength resulting from reflected and forward signal injection.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosTDMA Radio Units and Personality TypesThe two types of TDMA digital radios are briefly explained below. Digital Radio Unit (DRU) The DRU is the digital radio used with the Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA) system. The DRU occupies 2 slots on an RCF shelf. The DRU supports 3 full-duplex Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) on one 30-kHz bandwidth RF channel via Time-Division Multiplexing. Given that the DRU occupies 2 slots, the number of DRUs that can be housed in the P-RCF is half the number of RCUs, which is 28 DRUs. For the 2 Growth RCFs, the number of DRUs that can be housed is also half the number of RCUs, that is, 36 DRUs apiece. Altogether, an RFS fully-configured with DRUs can house 99 DRUs, including voice and locate radios. The software can support 256 DTCs. (Call setup is done by the DCCH with no setup radios required). The DRU is tested using a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU)The EDRU is an enhanced version of the DRU that is fully backward compatible with the DRU. The EDRU improves (i.e., enhances) many of the features offered by the DRU. Additionally, the EDRU provides new features and capabilities that the DRU cannot offer. The EDRU occupies 1 slot on an RCF shelf. That is, two EDRUs can be installed for each DRU. Like the DRU, the EDRU supports 3 DTCs. Each of the 3 channels can carry either Control information or Traffic (C/T). Because the EDRU, like the RCU, occupies only 1 slot on a radio shelf, the Primary RCF has enough radio slots for 56 EDRUs, and the Growth RCFs have enough radio slots for 72 EDRUs apiece. However, a 430AB power converter unit is required to support a maximum of 8 EDRUs per shelf. Additionally, due to software limitations, the maximum number of EDRUs supported are: ■RCF0: 23 EDRUs ■RCF1: 40 EDRUs ■RCF2: 16 EDRUs ■Total: 79 EDRUs The total number of EDRUs per cell should not exceed 79, including voice and locate radios. Call setup is done by the DCCH with no setup radios required. The EDRU is tested using a TRTU. Digital Radio Personality Types The following paragraphs provide a brief description of each TDMA radio personality type: Digital Voice RadioPerforms the digital traffic channel function_carries up to three over-the-air TDMA calls.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-9RadiosDigital Control Channel (DCCH) RadioPerforms the digital setup and short message service functions_ establishes calls via the DCCH with mobile subscribers using IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles. The DCCH is carried on user channel 1. Typically, there is one DCCH per physical antenna face, or sector, in a TDMA system. Digital Beacon RadioPerforms the digital beacon channel function_transmits at a fixed level at all times to provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure. Typically, there is one beacon radio per physical antenna face in a TDMA system. Digital Locate RadioPerforms the digital locate channel function_assists with handoffs when the established TDMA call can be better served by an adjacent sector or cell by measuring the signal strength and verifying the digital verification color code (DVCC) of the IS-54B or IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile targeted for handoff. The digital locate radio is instrumental in the DVCC verification procedure. For the DRU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the digital control channel radio (D-DRU), digital voice radio (V-DRU), and digital beacon radio (B-DRU). At initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other specific parameter values to each DRU. There is another NVM image file for the digital locate radio (L-DRU), and still another for the TRTU. A DRU or EDRU provides a basic modulation efficiency of three user channels per 30-kHz of bandwidth. The three user channels are designated user channel 1, user channel 2, and user channel 3. Each user channel is assigned one trunk (DS0) on the T1 line and one duplex timeslot on the RCF internal TDM bus, which is always installed "red stripe up." A D-DRU or D-EDRU may also carry digital traffic and beacon channels. Thus, a D-DRU or D-EDRU can serve three functions concurrently: (1) perform the digital setup function_establish calls via the DCCH with mobile subscribers using IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles, (2) carry one or two over-the-air TDMA calls, and (3) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure. Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for DCCH radios, the D-DRU or D-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control. The EDRU, unlike the DRU, will be able to carry more than one DCCH. That is, in a future release, an EDRU will be able to carry one, two, or three DCCHs. A B-DRU or B-EDRU may also carry digital traffic channels. Thus, a B-DRU or B-EDRU can serve two functions concurrently:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Radios(1) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure and (2) carry one, two, or even three over-the-air TDMA calls. (A digital beacon channel may double as a digital traffic channel.) Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for beacon radios, the B-DRU or B-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control. A V-DRU or V-EDRU may only carry digital traffic channels. A V-DRU or V-EDRU can carry one, two, or three digital traffic channels. An L-DRU may only carry digital locate channels. An L-DRU can carry one, two, or three digital locate channels. DRU - Detailed Description The Digital Radio Unit (DRU) is the digital radio used with the Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA) system. The DRU is entirely digital, self contained, comes with all the software needed to support TDMA, and does not need any additional equipment to support call processing. The DRU plugs into the same connectors as the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) that is used with AMPS Systems. However, whereas the RCU occupies 1 slot in a Radio Channel Frame (RCF), the DRU occupies 2 slots in an RCF. Then again, the RCU provides only 1 analog channel, whereas the DRU supports 3 full-duplex Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) on one 30-kHz bandwidth RF channel via Time-Division Multiplexing. The DRU can support control information (DCCH) on 1 of its channels and (voice) Traffic on the other 2 channels. If the Cell Site supports the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature, the DCCH will perform the setup function for digital calls and no setup radios will be required. (Setup radios will still be required for analog calls). The DRU’s dimensions are nominally 8 inches high by 3 inches wide by 14 inches deep. Although the DRU is twice as wide as the RCU and occupies 2 slots as compared with 1 slot for the RCU, DRUs and RCUs can sit side-by-side on the same RCF shelf. The combination of DRUs and RCUs allowed on a 12-slot RCF shelf is as follows: (2 x Number of DRUs) + (Number of RCUs) = 12 slots The Radio Test Unit (RTU) shelf of an RCF contains 8 available slots. Therefore, the combination of DRUs and RCUs allowed on the 8-slot RCF is as follows: (2 x Number of DRUs) + (Number of RCUs) = 8 slots The placement of DRUs on a radio shelf in constrained as follows. While the DRU uses 2 RCU slots, it makes contact with only 1 backplane slot. That slot is the one on the left if one is viewing the equipment from the front. To place the maximum number of DRUs on a shelf, the DRU must be installed so that it makes contact
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-11Radioswith the even-numbered RCU slot. On an RCU shelf, for example, the valid locations for 6 DRUs would be RCU slots 0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 8-9, and 10-11. The connections would be at slots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10. On RCF shelves containing 12 RCU slots, +5 Volts DC power is provided by 1 of 2 units; The 415 AA DC/DC unit and the 415 AC DC/DC unit. The power converter used depends on the combination of RCU and DRU/EDRU units on the shelf. An important feature that increases the flexibility of the system and protects your investment in the DRU is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This makes it quick and easy to accommodate future revisions in the IS-54A standard and reduces down-time for upgrades. The DRU consists of 2 modules. One is the Signal Processing Module (SPM), which contains 3 circuit boards. The other is the Transceiver Circuit Module (TCM), which contains one circuit board. The DRU is tested using a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The DRU faceplate provides a channel display and LED status indicators. The DRU is also used to support the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature. For information regarding how the DRU is used to support the DCCH, please see the appropriate section in this document. EDRU - Detailed Description The Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is an enhanced version of the Digital Radio Unit (DRU) that is used with Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) systems. The EDRU is fully back-compatible with the DRU and can perform all the functions of a DRU. When the EDRU is used to perform the same functions that a DRU performs, it uses the same commands. Like the DRU, the EDRU supports 3 full-duplex Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) on one RF channel via Time-Division Multiplexing. However, the EDRU occupies only 1 radio slot, whereas the DRU occupies 2. The EDRU’s dimensions are nominally those of the Radio Channel Unit (RCU): Height: 7.67 inches. Width: 1.5 inches. Table 9-1. 415 AA/AC DC/DC Power Unit 415AA DC/DC power supply 415 AC DC/DC power unit DRUs/EDRUs RCUs DRUs/EDRUs RCUs1 DRU/EDRU 10 RCUs 4 DRUs/EDRUs 4 RCUs 2 DRUs/EDRUs 8 RCUs 5 DRUs/EDRUs 2 RCUs3 DRUs/EDRUs 6 RCUss 6 DRUs/EDRUs 0 RCUs
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-12 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosDepth: 14.15 inches, including the connector and face plate that extends from the EDRU. Depth: 13.86 inches, excluding the connector and face plate that extends from the EDRU. RCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs can sit side-by-side on the same RCF shelf. If the Cell Site supports the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature, the DCCH will perform the setup function for digital calls and no setup radios will be required. (Setup radios will still be required for analog calls). The Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Systems that support Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Implementation are the Series II, IIm (mini), IImm (micro-cell), IIe (enhanced), Compact Base Station (CBS), and Personal Communications Services (PCS) TDMA Minicell. The EDRU complies with the standards that define control, traffic, and data operations for both cellular and PCS TDMA systems. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, the EDRU contains all features specified in this document for both cellular and PCS operations. The EDRU is software-configurable as the 2 radio types that follow: 1. Control/Traffic radio (C/T-EDRU) When the EDRU is configured as a C/T-EDRU it supports DCCH or DTC func-tionality in any combination for any of the 3 full-duplex channels it provides. The C/T-EDRU supports DTC structure for the forward and reverse digital traffic channels as defined in the standards for TDMA frame format, time-slot format, data rate, and timing relationships. The C/T-EDRU supports the following config-urations for DTC and DCCH on the same RF carrier. ■Digital Verification Color Code (DVCC) detection ■Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Estimates. In addition, the EDRU can perform any of these functions for PCS systems if external frequency conversion is provided. 2. Locate Radio (L-EDRU) The Locate Radio performs the following: ■Diagnostics and Functional Tests Table 9-2. C/T EDRU Configurations C/T EDRU ConfigurationsConfiguration Time Slot 1 Time Slot 2 Time Slot 31 DTC DTC DTC2 DCCH DTC DTC
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-13Radios■Power level measurements Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) ComponentsThe two modules in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU), and the functions they perform, are outlined below: 1. Transceiver Circuit Module (TCM): a. The EDRU’s TCM uses a transmitter to: ■Up-convert baseband signals from the Signal Processing Module (SPM) to digitally modulated Radio Frequency (RF) signals■Send the digitally modulated RF signals to the RF output ports The transmitter’s 4 components are: —Up-Converter —Amplifiers —Filters —Power Control Circuits b. The EDRU’s TCM uses a receiver to: ■Down-convert digitally modulated RF signals from the RF input ports to baseband signals. ■Send the baseband signals to the demodulator (SPM). The receiver’s 4 major components are: —Down-Converter —Amplifiers —Filters —Gain Control Circuits The TCM contains the EDRU RF circuitry and uses the power converter voltages below: ■+12 VDC-RF ■-12 VDC power converter voltages. 2. Signal Processing Module (SPM): Contains the EDRU’s digital circuitry. The major components in the SPM are the Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) that perform the necessary functions by exe-cuting the code stored in the firmware. The functions of the SPM are:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-14 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Radios■Communicating with the Radio Channel Complex (RCC) via the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up." The EDRU provides the capability to transmit uplink (EDRU to RCC) messages and to receive downlink (RCC to EDRU) messages over the TDM bus. ■Supervising TCM Operations ■Speech Coding and De coding ■Channel Coding and Decoding ■Interleaving and De-Interleaving ■Formatting and Deformatting ■Modulating and Demodulating ■Providing Equalization ■Providing Echo Cancellation ■Providing Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Estimates. The three functions listed below are performed differently for Digital Traffic Channels (DTCs) and Digital Control CHannels (DCCHs). 1. Channel Coding/Decoding 2. Interleaving/De-Interleaving 3. Formatting/Deformatting Features. The SPM contains the EDRU Digital Circuitry, and it uses the power converter voltages below: ■+12 VDC ■-12 VDC ■+5 VDC To prevent noise from disturbing the RF circuitry, no digital circuitry in the entire system is permitted to use the +12 VDC-RF power converter voltage, which is different from the +12 VDC. The EDRU heat dissipation does not exceed 43.9 W. Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) InterfacesThe Series II Cell Site, Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Backplane Connection features Fastech backplane connectors in the Radio Channel Frame (RCF) that provide the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) with the 4 following interfaces: 1. Radio Frequency (RF) ■To provide receive diversity, the EDRU has 2 external RF input (receive) ports via backplane connections. ■The EDRU has 1 external RF output (transmit) port via a backplane con-nection.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-15Radios2. Reference Frequency ■The EDRU has 1 external reference frequency input port via a backplane connection. 3. DC Power The EDRU operates appropriately when all its supply voltages are within 5% of their nominal values. The maximum EDRU current drain on supply voltages of the 4 interfaces is as follows: ■Current drain for +12 VDC-RF source is 1.0 A■Current drain for -12 VDC source is 0.2 A■Current drain for +12 VDC source is 0.2 A■Current drain for +5 VDC source is 5.0 A4. Digital Signal The EDRU has an external TDM bus interface to connect to the TDM bus via the backplane. The TDM bus is always installed "red stripe up."In the Series II and Series IIe Cell Sites, the EDRU is connected to either TDM bus 0 or TDM bus 1, depending on where the EDRU is installed in the frame. Each TDM bus has 2 sides, an "A side"and a "B side,"for redundancy. Only 1 side is active at any given time. TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."In other systems, that are not Series II or Series IIe Cell Sites, the EDRU is connected to only 1 TDM bus. That TDM bus also has an "A side"and a "B side." The interfaces specified here are for the 2 sides of whichever TDM bus is serving the EDRU. The EDRU uses the active TDM bus to communicate with the RCC. Environmental Features: ■Internal Cabinet Temperature: From 0x C to 65x C. ■Humidity: From 5% relative humidity to the lesser of 95% relative humidity or 0.024 g water vapor per gram of dry air over the internal cabinet temperature range. ■Altitude: From 200 feet below sea level to 10,000 feet above sea level.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-16 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosEnhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) Reliability, Federal Communications Commission (FCC), and Safety FeaturesThe following lists the EDRU reliability, FCC and safety features: ■The reliability of the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is less than 2500 FIT, equating to a MTBF of 400,000 hours. ■The useful lifetime of the EDRU is 7 years. ■The EDRU complies with the applicable features in Part 2, Part 15, and Part 22 of the FCC regulations. ■The EDRU in conjunction with the up-bander complies with the applicable fea-tures in Part 24 of the FCC regulations. ■The EDRU is UL-1950 approved. DRU/EDRU Power SupplyOn RCF shelves containing 12 RCU slots, +5 Volts DC power is provided by 1 of 2 units; The 415 AA DC/DC unit and the 415 AC DC/DC unit. The power converter used depends on the combination of RCU and DRU/EDRU units on the shelf. For the purposes of the table below, the DRU and EDRU are equivalent. An important feature that increases the flexibility of the system and protects your investment in the DRU is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from the. An important feature that increases the flexibility of the system and protects your investment in the DRU is the ability to download the DRU’s software/firmware from the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This makes it quick and easy to accommodate future revisions in the IS-54A standard and reduces down-time for upgrades. The DRU consists of 2 modules. One is the Signal Processing Module (SPM), which contains 3 circuit boards. The other is the Transceiver Circuit Module (TCM), which contains one circuit board. The DRU is tested using a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The DRU faceplate provides a channel display and LED status indicators. The DRU is also used to support the Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) feature. Directional Setup and Beacon ChannelsOnly a Radio Channel Unit (RCU) can be used for analog setup, but a DRU/EDRU may be used for digital setup. When the directional setup option is chosen, the entire LAC and antenna system previously used for omnidirectional setup may be Table 9-3. 415 AA/AC DC/DC Power Unit 415AA DC/DC power supply 415 AC DC/DC power unit DRUs/EDRUs RCUs DRUs/EDRUs RCUs1 DRU/EDRU 10 RCUs 4 DRUs/EDRUs 4 RCUs 2 DRUs/EDRUs 8 RCUs 5 DRUs/EDRUs 2 RCUs3 DRUs/EDRUs 6 RCUss 6 DRUs/EDRUs 0 RCUs
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-17Radioseliminated. Directional setup radios use the same antennas as do the voice radios. When there is directional setup in a cell, the mobile-assisted handoff feature of the DMMS transceivers scans the directional setup channels or the beacon channels to determine a candidate list of faces to hand off to. Omnidirectional setup is an option to the service provider. However, after Release 5.0, if omnidirectional setup is implemented in a Cell Site with directional voice sectors, then beacon channels must be provided to support the mobile-assisted handoff capability for DMMSs. With no directional setup in a Cell Site, the DMMSs scan the beacon radio frequencies for that Cell Site. A beacon channel is provided by a designated voice radio which transmits its carrier at a constant power level. Each antenna sector in a Cell Site must be allocated one beacon channel. Beacon channels are provided at the request of the service provider and are required only when the Cell Site has directional voice with omni setup, or when the Cell Site is equipped entirely with analog RCUs and the neighboring Cell Site is equipped with digital channels. Other setup options are simulcast setup or DCCH setup. Setup radios are installed in the top radio shelves of the P-RCF. Normally, at start-up, two setup radios (one active and one standby) are used. TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) The TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) is a plug-in unit required in the P-RCF to test the Digital Radio Units (DRUs) and other DRU-related equipment. It is one of several test units in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF). The RTU tests the analog Radio Control Units (RCUs). The TRTU is composed of two functional groups 1. the Transceiver Functional Group and the 2. Signal Processing Functional Group. The Transceiver Functional Group tests RF-related functions. The Signal Processing Functional Group tests baseband speech processing, speech, channel and message coding, equalization, and communication. The TRTU exchanges messages with other equipment in the P-RCF via a TDM bus, which is always installed "red stripe up."The RTU Control Board (RCB) is used to multiplex the communication between the RTU and TRTU and the RTU Switch Panel (RSP). The RSP allows the appropriate test unit, TRTU or RTU, to test the DRU or RCU, respectively. There is a cabling kit to route the RF signals to and from the appropriate test unit. Frames ordered from the factory come with the option built in. For frames already in the field, there is a package available for field installation.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-18 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosTest Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), Feature IDentification (FID) #2775Cell Sites that can use the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)This chapter covers the "Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)"feature, which has Feature IDentification (FID) #2775. The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is a more advanced alternative to the older TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) for testing EDRUs, but not DRUs. The T-EDRU may be used in all Series II Classic, Series IIe, Series IIm, Series IImm and PCS TDMA Minicell Products that are equipped with EDRUs only. The functionality on the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU), which is used to test DRUs and EDRUs, is identically replicated on the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU). However, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) takes up half the space of the TRTU and is used to test EDRUs only. The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is identical in terms of hardware and physical size to the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU). The only difference between it and the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is that a different Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) software/firmware image is downloaded into it from the Radio Control Complex (RCC) over the Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up."The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) and the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) are not supported in the same base station at the same time. Only one TDMA test radio, either the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) or the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is required per base station. One Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is enough to test the Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs) in one or more radio frames, equipped with EDRUs only, within a single cell site. Like the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU), the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is located in the radio test slot of the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) at the cell site. Because only 1 Test Radio is used per cell site, if it fails, all diagnostic testing that requires the Test Radio must be suspended. The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is placed in the 2 lower numbered Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus addresses currently used by the Table 9-4. Placement and Use of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)Dimensions and Placement TRTU T-EDRUHeight 8.00 inches 8.00 inchesDepth 14.15 inches 14.15 inchesWidth 3.00 inches 3.00 inchesTest Capability TRTU (Tests DRUs and EDRUs) T-EDRU (Tests EDRUs only)SBRCU slots used 4 SBRCU slots 2 SBRCU slots RCU slots used 2 RCU slots 1 RCU slot
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-19RadiosTDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) for all Series II products and the TDMA PCS Minicell. TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."Only in the case of the Series IImm can a Control/Traffic Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (C/T-EDRU) or a Locate EDRU (L-EDRU) be allowed to occupy and operate in the 2 higher numbered Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus addresses, which are also the 2 available Single Board Radio Channel Unit (SBRCU) slots next to the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU). This capability is not supported on other products. The 2 slots for the Control/Traffic in the Series II mm have been designed to support receive and transmit functions to these backplane slots. Also, the amplification scheme in the Series IImm products allow for the addition of another radio. Testing Supported by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is functionally backward compatible with the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). Additionally, it supports all functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing of the following: ■Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs) (In Any Configuration) ■Radio Frequency (RF) Switches ■Transmit Antennas ■Receive Antennas ■Lightwave Microcell Transceiver (LMT) ■Lightwave Microcell Transceiver (LMT) Optical Link. Functional tests are performed when a radio is in service. Diagnostic and measurement tests are performed when a radio is out of service. Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Self-Test 0As part of Lucent’s maintenance strategy, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) tests itself before it tests the other radios. The self-diagnostics performed by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) include measuring the following: ■Transmit Power Level ■Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Integrity ■Time Alignment ■Radio Frequency (RF) Signals on the Switchable Shelf Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) ConnectivityThe Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) simulates a mobile station in order to test the TDMA radios and any other TDMA related equipment in the cell
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-20 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Radiossite. Failures are treated the same as a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) provides a control lead and an RS-422 interface to the Radio Test Unit (RTU) Communications Board (RCB). The Radio Test Unit (RTU) Communications Board (RCB) is used to provide Radio Frequency (RF) connectivity to the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch panel. Radio Control Complex (RCC) Generic Maintenance Software Capability 0Generic maintenance software in the Radio Control Complex (RCC) can: ■Control the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) transmit and receive antenna switches. ■Transmit Radio Frequency (RF) signals to TDMA radios located on switchable shelves to test the receive paths through the antenna switches. ■Transmit Radio Frequency (RF) signals directly to TDMA radios, then to the receive antennas, for performing return loss measurements. ■Measure digital voice radios for transmit and receive power level testing. ■Perform transmit power level/RSSI integrity self tests. ■Perform a voice band signal processing/transmission level adjustment test in the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) using a tone sent to the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) over the Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, transmitted and received within the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), and returned to the Time-Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus, which is always installed "red stripe up."■Perform new functions associated with digital radios and the fiber optic transmis-sion system. ■Perform internal Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) loop-back tests. Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Transmit Testing 0The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), like the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU), tests TDMA signals in both the transmit and receive directions. For tests in the transmit direction, a radio in the Radio Control Frame injects signals into the forward transmission path. A directional coupler couples attenuated Radio Frequency (RF) signals proportional to the incident and reflected power in the antenna path back to the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) for measurement. The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) reports the measurements back to the Radio Control Complex (RCC) for processing and analysis. The Radio Frequency (RF) connectivity of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) supports functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-21RadiosTest Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Transmit Testing 0For tests of performance in the receive direction, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) functions as a transmitter and injects an Radio Frequency (RF) signal through a face selector switch into a directional coupler and finally to the antenna. A radio in the radio frame then measures the Radio Frequency (RF) signal strength it receives and passes the measurements to the Radio Control Complex (RCC) for processing and analysis. When the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is in receive mode, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) supports functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing. Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Testing of C/T-EDRU, L-EDRU, and DCCH The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) supports all functional, diagnostic, and measurement testing of the Control/Traffic (C/T-EDRU) and the Locate EDRU (L-EDRU). When it performs Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) functional testing, the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) transmits on one time slot only. Not transmitting on the other time slots minimizes the interference during Digital Control CHannel (DCCH) testing. Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Bit-Error Rate (BER)The Bit-Error Rate (BER) of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) with diversity on does not exceed 1% under the following conditions: ■The carrier to noise ratio is 30 dB or higher. ■The delay interval is zero ■The Radio Frequency (RF) input signal is static, and its power level is within the dynamic range of the receiver. Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Power RequirementsThe Radio Control Complex (RCC) software handles the difference in power outputs when a Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is substituted for a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) and Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) are designed to operate at attenuation 0 setting at a nominal power level of +10 dBm with a minimum adjustable range using the faceplate potentiometer of +/- 3 db over environmental conditions. The maximum transmit power from the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) could be as great as +15 dBm before calibration by a technician. A technician is required to adjust the potentiometer on the front panel of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) to ensure it is set to +10 dBm at attenuation 0 when installed. The power output level of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is +10 dBm instead of +4 dBm as it was in the TDMA Radio Test Unit
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-22 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Radios(TRTU). Code in the Radio Control Complex (RCC) subtracts 6 dB from all Radio Frequency (RF) signals transmitted by the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU). MSC and TI OA&M for the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU)The Mobile Switching Center (MSC) can perform the same functions on the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) that it performs on the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). The system operator can check the status of the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU), remove it from service, perform diagnostics on it, and return it back to service using the same Technician Interface (TI) commands that are used for the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU). Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OA&M) operations that can be performed on the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) include: ■Checking status ■Removing (Take out of service manually) ■Take out of service automatically for routine diagnostics. ■Restore (Bring back to service and reset all parameters used to control it) Aside from the wide range of testing that the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) brings to the service provider, it allows the Series IImm to add another Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) to its Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF) to increase control or traffic channel capacity. Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) Activation Not Required 0The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is not activated by a Feature Activation File (FAF). The Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) is activated by simply replacing a TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) with a Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU). That is, placing the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) in the test radio slot in the Primary Radio Channel Frame (P-RCF). RC/V Configuration of Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) 0Recent Change & Verify (RC/V) allows the technician to equip and configure the Test Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (T-EDRU) in the same way that the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU) is configured.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-23RadiosCDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesFor each CDMA cluster (one CCC managing up to seven CCUs), there is one NVM image file for the CCC, another for the pilot/sync/access (P/S/A) CE personality, another for the page CE personality, another for the traffic CE personality, and still another for the orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS) CE personality. At initialization, the CCC downloads the personality-type image files and other specific parameter values into active memory of the CCUs_the CCC downloads exactly one personality-type image file to each CCU CE. There is another NVM image file for the BBA, another for the CRTUi, and still another for the SCT. The CCU contains two on-board CEs. Thus, a CCC can manage up to 14 CEs. For the cellular band class (850 MHz), the TIA IS-95A standard defines two common carriers: the primary CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel 283 for System A (A band) and 384 for System B (B band), and the secondary CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel 691 for System A (A’ band) and 777 for System B (B’ band). Each CDMA omni cell or cell sector must be assigned at least one common carrier. For the PCS band class (1900 MHz), candidates for common CDMA carriers range from channel numbers 25 to 1175 in increments of 25. Each common CDMA carrier (primary, secondary) on an antenna face has one CE configured as the P/S/A CE and another configured as the page CE. The two CEs may be on the same CCU or on different CCUs within the same CDMA cluster. The following paragraphs provide a brief description of each CDMA CE personality type:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-24 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000RadiosFigure 9-2. CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types Pilot/Sync/Access Channel Element (CE)The CE Performs part of the CDMA call setup function_establishes calls with mobile subscribers using IS-95A or IS-95B compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles. The pilot channel is an unmodulated, direct-sequence spread-spectrum signal transmitted continuously by each sector of a CDMA cell. It allows the mobile to acquire the timing of the forward control channels and provides a coherent carrier phase reference for demodulating the sync and paging channels. The sync channel provides time-of-day and frame synchronization to the mobile. The mobile uses this channel to acquire cell and sector-specific information. The access channel is a CDMA reverse channel used for short signaling message exchange such as mobile registration, mobile call origination, and response to pages. The access channel is a slotted random access channel used by mobiles to communicate to the Cell Site. Page CE Performs part of the CDMA call setup function_transmits control information to idle mobiles during mobile powerup and when a mobile is acquiring a new Cell Site. It conveys pages to the mobiles. Traffic CE Performs the CDMA traffic channel function_carries one over-the-air CDMA call. A traffic channel, which is a communication path between a mobile station and a TECHNOLOGYTYPE:HARDWARETYPE:PERSONALITYTYPE:CDMAACU*CCUCCCP/S/A CE PAGE CE OCNS CETRAFFIC CESCTBCR* BIU* CRTUiNVMIMAGE NVMIMAGE NVMIMAGE NVMIMAGECE CENVMIMAGE NVMIMAGE NVMIMAGENVMIMAGE* BCR-BIU-ACU = BBA
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 9-25RadiosCell Site, carries user and signaling information. The term traffic channel implies a forward and reverse pair. Orthogonal-channel Noise Simulator CESimulates a specified number of mobile users operating in a specified sector on a specified carrier. OCNS allows generation of a simulated user load on the CDMA forward channels in order to assist in verifying the capacity of the CDMA system.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page9-26 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-110Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsContents■Contents 10-1■Introduction 10-3Fixed Antenna Connection Configuration 10-53-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching Configuration 10-86-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching with Dual-Radio Solution 10-93- or 6-Sector Directional Antenna Switching with Simulcast Setup 10-9All-Omnidirectional Configuration 10-9All-Directional Configuration 10-10■Radio Transmission and Reception 10-13RF Transmitter Interfaces 10-13RF Receiver Interfaces 10-142 Branch Intelligent Antenna, Feature IDentification (FID) #3145 10-14What “2 Branch” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas 10-14How the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is used to support 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas 10-15What “Intelligent” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas 10-15
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsThe Adaptive Interference Rejection Technique 10-15Performance with 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas 10-152 Branch Intelligent Antennas Phased Release 10-16
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-3Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsIntroductionThe Series II Cell Site accommodates up to seven antenna faces, thus permitting implementation of omnidirectional, 3-sector (120 degrees per sector), 6-sector (60 degrees per sector), or other special antenna configurations. Each antenna face has an antenna set, which typically consists of one transmit antenna and two (diversity) receive antennas.There are two basic antenna types:1. Omnidirectional antennas—antennas having an omnidirectional pattern.Omnidirectional antennas are approximately 14 feet high and 3 inches in diameter. They are typically mounted at the corners of a 3-sided platform at the top of a free-standing steel mast.2. Directional antennas—antennas having a unidirectional pattern.Directional antennas usually have higher gain than omnidirectional antennas. There are two basic directional antenna types: the 120-degree directional antenna, which covers a 120-degree sector in a given cell, and the 60-degree directional antenna, which covers a 60-degree sector in a given cell.The directional antennas are mounted on each side (face) of a 3-sided or 6-sided platform at the top of a free-standing steel mast.Omni cells are Cell Sites using omnidirectional antennas. Sector cells are Cell Sites using directional antennas. An omni-configured system costs significantly less per customer (mobile user) than a sectored installation.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsFigure 10-1. Series II Cell Site Antenna Configurations123Sector Number456ALL-Directional, 3-SectorAntenna ConfigurationOMNI DirectionalAntenna Configuration ALL-Directional, 6-SectorAntenna ConfigurationNEWS0°90°180°270°225°315°45°135°NESESWNWβγααβγALPHABETAGAMMAANT Face DESG Greek SymbolαβγDELTAEPSILONZETAδεζδεζ
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-5Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsIn addition to the two basic antenna types listed above, there is a new 2-branch intelligent antenna type. The 2-branch intelligent antenna will be the third type of antenna discussed.Fixed Antenna Connection Configuration Shelves equipped for the fixed antenna connection option (see Figure 10-2) can be used in frames where all the Radio Channel Units (RCUs) are connected to an omni antenna or connected to directive antennas, or in frames that have some RCUs connected to omni antennas and some connected to directive antennas. On shelves with the fixed antenna connection configuration, power combiners and dividers interface 3 radio groups of 4 radios each. For the transmit direction, the grouping on each shelf is by 4:1 RF power combiners located on a BBN2 circuit board. The output of each combiner is cabled to the Interconnection Panel Assembly where it is connected to 9:1 power combiners for transmission to the LAFs. In this arrangement, the 9:1 combiners can accommodate up to nine groups of four RCUs for a total of 36; they can also handle up to seven antennas, which can be directive, omni, or a combination of the two. There is a test port on each 9:1 combiner through which the power level in each channel signal can be measured with either a Radio Frequency (RF) power meter having a tunable front end or a spectrum analyzer. The coupling loss between the main output and the test port is 20 ± 0.5 dB. For the Simulcast Setup feature with macrocell only (a macrocell is a Series II antenna sector), the transmit path (see Figure 10-3) uses a 1:6 divider in Series with a nominal 2-dB RF pad. The 1:6 divider is used to split the setup radio signals to each sector antenna. The combined loss of the RF pad and 1:6 splitter is almost the same as the loss of the 9:1 combiners that feed signals to the LACs. The two setup radios used for Simulcast must be located in positions that are each powered by a different power unit and served by the same shelf 4:1 combiner.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware Configurations Figure 10-2. Interconnection Panel Assembly/DIV 01 Rx RF SIG/DIV 01 Rx RF SIG/DIV 01 Rx RF SIGA. FIXED ANTENNA CONNECTION1110RCU/DIV 01/DIV 01/DIV 01/DIV 01/DIV 01/DIV 01RAMES(ZETA)(DELTA)DVDR1:9//Rx ANT "2"Rx ANT "1"Rx ANT "0"DIV 01(GAMMA)(BETA)(ALPHA)(OMNI)RF PWRNTFNTROM/PRIMARY/GROWTHP/ORCFRCU SHELFNON-SWITCHABLEP/ORx ANT "6"Rx ANT "5"Rx ANT "4"ASSEMBLYP/OINTERCONNECTION(EPSILON)DIV 01 Rx RF SIGDIV 01 RF RCVR/DVDRBOARDNCRx ANT "3"//0RCURCU98RCURCURCU7654RCURCURCURCU321RCURCU1:4DVDRRF PWR
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-7Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsFigure 10-3. Antenna InterfaceP/O AIFZETA RX-DIVERSITY 11:6ANTENNAS FROMEPSILONDELTAGAMMABETAALPHACOUPLERTESTFRAMESETRADIOTOBANDPASS1:61:61:6RFSIGCAL COUPLERZETA RX-DIVERSITY 0SPLITTERPRE-AMPLIFIERLOW-NOISEOMNI RX-DIVERSITY 1OMNI RX-DIVERSITY 0FILTERNOTCHFILTER
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsFigure 10-4. Primary RCF Switch Antenna Connector3-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching Configuration This description pertains to setup and locate radios only. In this configuration, the switchable antenna connection option is used for the receive path (see Figure 10-4). With the switchable antenna connection option, each Radio Channel Unit (RCU) on the shelf can switch receive paths to any one of 4 available antennas. Receive inputs from the AIFs are coupled through 1:9 RF power dividers in the Interconnection Panel Assembly to 1:12 power dividers on a BBM1 circuit board on the RCU shelf. One board is used for each of the two diversities. Each board has 12 single-pole, four-position Radio Frequency (RF) switches. Each switch is associated with and controlled by an RCU.The control lines to the switches in the two receive diversity paths associated with the same RCU are connected in parallel and, therefore, controlled simultaneously. Fixed antenna connections are used in the transmit path. RAMES(B) SWITCHABLE ANTENNA CONNECTIONP/O PRIMARY RCFASSEMBLYINTERCONNECTIONNTFNTROMP/OANT "3"(BETA)ANT "2"(ALPHA)ANT "1"DIV 0/1DIV 0/1DIV 0/1(OMNI)ANT "0"INTERCONNRX SIG INRX SIG INRX SIG INASSEMDIV 0/1RX SIG IN(ZETA)ANT "6"ANT "4"ANT "5"(DELTA)DIV 0/1DIV 0/1(GAMMA)DIV 0/1(EPSILON)RX SIG INRX SIG INP/ORX SIG INDVDRRF PWR1:9DVDRRF PWR1:9SW CONT SIGGAMMA 0RCUSHELF "1"(RCU SWITCHABLE SHELF)RX RF SIGSW-0DIV 0/1 RF RCVR AMPL/4X12 SWITCH/CMBR BOARDBETAALPHAOMNIDVDRRF PWR1:12P/O DUAL-SHELF RCU ASSEMBLY1:12SW CONT SIG 1RCUSW-1 RX RF SIGSW CONT SIGSW CONT SIGSW CONT SIG111SW-11RCURX RF SIGRCURX RF SIGSW-1SW CONT SIGZETA 011RCURCUSHELF "2"(RCU SWITCHABLE SHELF)RX RF SIGSW-11 RX RF SIGEPSILONDELTA SW-0OMNIDIV 0/1 RF RCVR AMPL/4X12 SWITCH/CMBR BOARDDVDRRF PWR
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-9Antenna Hardware Configurations6-Sector Directive Plus Omni Antenna Switching with Dual-Radio Solution This description pertains to setup and locate radios only. In this configuration (see Figure 10-4), the hardware on the two shelves is the same as it is in the 3-sector configuration; the differences are in the way the connections are made to the AIFs. Fixed antenna connections are used for the transmit paths, and the switchable antenna connection option is used for each of the two diversities in the receive paths. Inputs from the Omni antenna and directive antennas 1 through 6 are coupled through 1:9 RF power dividers on the Interconnection Panel Assembly to BBM1 circuit boards on the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) shelves. One BBM is used for each of the two diversities. The BBM1 boards on shelf 1 are connected to the interface circuits of the Omni antenna and to directive antennas 1 through 3; the boards on shelf 2 are connected to the Omni antenna and to directive antennas 4 through 6. 3- or 6-Sector Directional Antenna Switching with Simulcast Setup In this configuration (see Figure 10-5), the hardware on the two shelves is the same as it is in the omni setup 3- or 6-sector configurations; the difference is that an omni antenna is not required for the setup radios. For 3-sector configurations, the “simulated omni” signal is connected from a 6:1 combiner in AIF0 to a connector in the RCF Interconnection Panel Assembly and through a 2-dB pad to the BBM1 board. For 4-, 5-, or 6-sector configurations, the 2-dB pad is replaced by a 1:2 divider. The combination of a 6:1 combiner and 2-dB pad and a 6:1 combiner and 1:2 divider are roughly equivalent to the loss of the 1:9 divider they replace. The simulated omni signal is sent to the upper Switchable Radio Shelf or, through the 1:2 divider, to both the upper and lower Switchable Radio Shelves. The 6:1 combiner output signal simulates the omnidirectional setup antenna signal of an omnidirectional setup/directional voice Cell Site, thereby eliminating the need for an omnidirectional antenna dedicated to the setup function. All-Omnidirectional ConfigurationThe basic all-omnidirectional configuration (see Figure 10-6) consists of one voice channel transmit antenna, one optional setup transmit antenna to handle transmission and paging signals over the entire cell,* and two receive antennas. The receive antennas feed all Cell Site voice channel radios, setup radios, and analog locate radios.In an all-omnidirectional configuration, up to seven voice channel transmit antennas are possible via the multiple-LAC feature. The multiple-LAC feature allows up to seven LACs and seven transmit antennas to be associated with one antenna face. The maximum number of transmit antennas at a Series II Cell Site is 7.* The basic all-omnidirectional configuration described here requires omnidirectional setup. There are three setup configuration options—omnidirectional setup, directional setup, and simulcast setup.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware Configurations.Figure 10-5. Mapping of Antenna Faces to Antenna Sets for theVarious Setup Options All-Directional Configuration In general, it will be necessary ultimately to sector omni cells to minimize interference and provide increased system performance quality. Sectoring (see Figure 10-5) is normally done with 120-degree directional antennas, where three transmit antennas are used to cover the full 360 degrees. Sectoring may also be done with 60-degree directional antennas, where six transmit antennas are used to cover the full 360 degrees.GROWTH—AIF1RX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXANT 5ANT 4B. SERIES II Cell Site WITH DIRECTIONAL OR SIMULCAST SETUPRef Freq GenRcvr Cal GenPRIMARY—AIF0RX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXANT 0ANT 1ANT 2Rad Sw Panel ALPHABETAGAMMAEPSILONZETARCFLAC 5RCFRCFLAC 4RCFRCFLAC 3RCFRCFLAC 2RCFRCFLAC 1RCFRCFLAC 0RCFGROWTH—AIF1RCFLAC 6RCFRCFLAC 5RCFRCFLAC 4RCFANT 5ANT 6ANT 4A. SERIES II Cell Site WITH OMNIDIRECTIONAL SETUPRef Freq GenRcvr Cal GenRCFLAC 3RCFRCFLAC 2RCFRCFLAC 1RCFRCFLAC 0RCFPRIMARY—AIF0RX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TX ANT 0ANT 1ANT 3ANT 2Radio Sw Panel OMNIALPHABETAGAMMADELTAEPSILONZETARX 0 RX 1TXRX 0 RX 1TXRX 1TXRX 0ANT 3 GAMMA
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-11Antenna Hardware Configurations Figure 10-6. Omnidirectional Cell Site Having Seven Transmit AntennasThe basic all-directional configuration consists of:1. Three sets of 3-sector (120-degree) directional antennas or six sets of 6-sector (60-degree) directional antennas,2. One optional omnidirectional setup transmit antenna to handle transmission and paging signals over the entire cell, and 3. Two optional omnidirectional setup receive antennas. Each physical antenna face has one or two directional transmit antennas and two directional receive antennas. Thus, when a cell is sectored, there are at least nine 120-degree directional antennas or 18 60-degree directional antennas, plus the optional three omnidirectional setup antennas to complete the configuration—for a maximum of 21 antennas at a Series II Cell Site.Growth—AIF1LAC 6LAC 5LAC 4TXTXTXVOICE TXVOICE TXVOICE TXRef Freq GenRcvr Cal GenLAC 3LAC 2LAC 1RCFLAC 0RCFPrimary—AIF0TXTXTXRX 0RX 1TX ANT 0VOICE TXVOICE TXVOICE TXRadio Sw Panel OMNILAC=RCF2RCF1RCF0AIF0RCF2RCF1RCF0RCF2RCF1RCF0RCF2RCF1RCF0AIF0AIF0AIF0Primary—LAF0AIF1RCF2RCF1RCF0RCF2RCF1RCF0RCF2RCF1RCF0AIF1AIF1Growth—LAF1LAC 3 OUTLAC 1 OUTLAC 2 OUTLAC 0 OUTLAC 4 OUTLAC 5 OUTLAC 6 OUTLAM=Legend:LAC 0LAC 2LAC 4LAC 6Setup TX (Note)Setup TX May Also Carry Voice Channels.Note:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-12 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsIf duplexers are used on each antenna face, the maximum number of antennas is reduced to 14. A duplexer is a combined receive and transmit filter panel that connects to a single antenna. Functionally, the receive and transmit circuits are the same as the separate receive and transmit filter panels, except that the duplexer provides a combined receive/transmit antenna port. Thus, the duplexer permits multiplexing of one of the receive paths—usually diversity 0—with the transmit path of an antenna face, thereby reducing the required number of antennas from three to two per face.A 3-sector cell has three physical antenna faces, which are functionally designated alpha, beta, and gamma. Usually, the antenna face whose center line is pointing north is called alpha. The antenna face clockwise from alpha is called beta, and the antenna face clockwise from beta is called gamma.A 6-sector cell has six physical antenna faces, which are functionally designated alpha, beta, gamma, delta, epsilon, and zeta. The antenna face clockwise from gamma is called delta, the antenna face clockwise from delta is called epsilon, and the antenna face clockwise from epsilon is called zeta.Figure 10-1 shows how the antenna faces map to antenna sets for the omnidirectional, directional, and simulcast setup options. Notice that antenna 0 does not necessarily mean antenna omni; antenna 0 may also mean antenna alpha—at a Cell Site having directional or simulcast setup.The Cell Site RCC identifies the transmit and receive antennas associated with an antenna face by the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) switch positions used to test them. The RSP cable connections to transmit antennas 0 through 6 are fixed, but the RSP cable connections to receive antennas 0 through 6 for diversity 0 and diversity 1 are not fixed and depend upon whether antenna 0 means antenna omni or antenna alpha. The RSP cable connections at a Series II Cell Site when antenna 0 means antenna omni (applicable to Cell Sites having omnidirectional setup). The RSP cable connections at a Series II Cell Site when antenna 0 means antenna alpha (applicable to Cell Sites having).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-13Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsRadio Transmission and ReceptionThe Cell Site receives digital-voice signals via a T1 line, modulates and up-converts the signals to RF, and then transmits the RF output signals over the air interface to a mobile station. In the mobile-transmit direction, the Cell Site receives RF input signals from a mobile station via the receive antennas (two inputs for diversity), then filters, amplifies, and recovers the original mobile data for transmission over a T1 line to the MSC.Two-branch spatial diversity on reception is achieved by providing two receive antennas physically separated by about 3 to 4 meters so that their received signals are not correlated. When one antenna receives a multipath fade, the other antenna probably will not.RF Transmitter Interfaces There are two distinct RF transmitter interface configurations: the all-omnidirectional antenna configuration and the all-directional (120- or 60-degree) antenna configuration. The RF output can be transmitted through an omni-transmit antenna or through a transmit antenna on one of the physical antenna faces of the directional antennas. The low-power RF transmissions from multiple radios are combined and amplified by a LAC and sent through a transmit filter panel to the transmit antenna (see Figure 10-7).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-14 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsFigure 10-7. Antenna CouplerRF Receiver Interfaces There are two distinct RF receiver interface configurations: the all-omnidirectional antenna configuration and the all-directional (120- and 60-degree) antenna configuration. The RF input can be received through a pair of omni-receive antennas or through a pair of receive antennas on one of the physical antenna faces of the directional antennas. The RF input signals pass through receive filter panels to RF power dividers, where the signals are divided and cabled to the diversity 0 and diversity 1 receiver sections (identical receivers) of the radios.2 Branch Intelligent Antenna, Feature IDentification (FID) #3145What “2 Branch” means in 2 Branch Intelligent AntennasThis chapter covers the “2 Branch Intelligent Antennas” feature, which has Feature IDentification (FID) #3145. The “2 Branch Intelligent Antennas” feature was developed to deliver better voice quality on the transmission link between the mobile and the base station. “2 branch” refers to the 2 existing paths, 1 path from each of the 2 diversity receive antennas, to the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) or the Dual Radio Module (DRM). While a four branch reverse link system would have yielded a greater improvement in voice quality, it would have required extensive redesign of the existing Series II architecture. Therefore, the 2 branch system, which required no redesign, was implemented. P/O AIFANTENNASTO TXTx"6"Tx"5"Tx"4"Tx"3"Tx"2"Tx"1"Tx"0"FILTERTX BANDPASS TEST COUPLERAFROM
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-15Antenna Hardware ConfigurationsHow the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit (EDRU) is used to support 2 Branch Intelligent AntennasThe 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas feature is implemented in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU’s) software. However, the 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature does not add a new Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) image. Both of the existing Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU’s) Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) images (packet pipe & non-packet pipe) incorporate the new software. The Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) is used in the Series II Classic, Series IIe, Series IIm, Series IImm, and PCS TDMA Minicell products. The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature is not intended for and does not work with Lucent’s analog products. No extra Radio Frequency (RF) hardware is required to implement this feature and it does not impact the existing base station’s Radio Frequency (RF) footprint, antennas, size, or power. What “Intelligent” means in 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas“Intelligent Antennas” refers to an entire system comprised of a radiating structure with antennas for transmit and receive, which are connected via Radio Frequency (RF) cables to a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) (within the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) which has the ability to execute intelligent algorithms that process the Radio Frequency (RF) signals to improve system performance.The Adaptive Interference Rejection TechniqueThe 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature uses the “Adaptive Interference Rejection,” technique, also known as digital beamforming, for optimally combining the 2 diversity receive antennas. Adaptive Interference Rejection captures the Radio Frequency (RF) signals from the antenna elements and converting them into 2 streams of binary I and Q signals, which together represent the amplitudes and phases of the signals received by the antenna. The adaptive interference rejection is carried out by weighting these digital signals, thereby adjusting their amplitudes and phases, such that when they are added together, it maximizes the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SINR) for the desired signal. A typical digital adaptive interference rejection system consists of an array of antenna elements, independent receivers for the individual antenna elements, and one or more digital signal processors. This feature is a software enhancement only and makes use of the existing 2 branch architecture for receive diversity built into the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU). This feature works for only the reverse link in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU). All processing is done at baseband.Performance with 2 Branch Intelligent AntennasThe 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature provides better voice quality in an interference dominated environment on the reverse link (Mobile to Base Station) only. The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas feature yields a 3 dB performance enhancement in the reverse link C/I in an interference limited environment when compared to the existing maximal ratio combining technique used in the
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-16 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Antenna Hardware Configurationsdifferential detection and trellis equalization paths. On average, co-channel interference is expected to decrease by a nominal 3 dB compared to the classic diversity scheme in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) in an interference limited environment. The level of improvement depends on the distribution of co-channel users in neighboring cells. This feature allows each 30 kHz TDMA channel, through software processing, to reduce/eliminate the effects of co-channel interference within the field of view of the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU). Baseband processing is able to combine the spatially separated diversities for interference rejection. The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature equals the performance of the existing maximal ratio combining technique when used in a noise limited environment. The feature does not increase the existing capacity or range of the base station in a noise limited environment. A tower top Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), however, provides range extension on the reverse link in a noise limited environment. Using this feature together with a tower top Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) would yield interference rejection and range extension on the reverse link. However, the purpose of this feature is to improve voice quality in an interference limited environment, not a noise limited environment. Activation of this feature does not degrade the existing performance of the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) in a noise limited environment. Digital Locate under 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas 0The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature should not be implemented on the digital locate radio. Locate radios are used to determine if a call will be placed on a certain channel. Selection criteria should be based on the best channel in a noise limited environment. Calls should not be placed on channels with a lot of interference.2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Testing 0Testing of the 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas on the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) feature is done in maximal ratio combining mode. Current testing in the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) only tests one branch of the dual diversity receive paths at a time. To eliminate the development of a new testing routine with minimal gains, the Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRU) should be switched back to maximal ratio combining mode and tested one branch at a time. 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Phased ReleaseThe 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature is a phased release. Phase 1 implements this feature on the digital traffic radio and incorporates the adaptive interference rejection technique into the differential detection path of the Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 10-17Antenna Hardware Configurations2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature Activation 0The 2 Branch Intelligent Antennas Feature is activated on a per Cell Site Feature Activation File with Qualifiers (QFAF) basis. The feature is enabled from the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) by a translation to select adaptive interference mode or maximal ratio combining mode on a cell by cell basis. All Enhanced Digital Radio Unit’s (EDRUs) at the cell site have the feature turned on or off on a cell by cell basis using RC/V.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page10-18 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-111Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsContents■Contents 11-1■Introduction 11-5Radio Control Complex (RCC) 11-5Digital Signal (DS1) Units 11-6Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) Units 11-6Clock And Tone (CAT) Units 11-7Radio Frame Set 11-7RCF Architecture and Bus Structure 11-9System bus 11-9Update bus 11-9TDM buses 11-9■Data Link and VoicePath Connections11-14T1/E1 Communications 11-14T1 Line Interface 11-16E1 Line Interface 11-16■Line Interface Connections at the Cell 11-17■Data Link Configurations 11-21One DS1/DFI Unit and One Data Link 11-21
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsOne DS1/DFI Unit and Two Data Links 11-21Two DS1/DFI Units and Two Data Links 11-21Remote Data Link Reconfiguration 11-21■ External Interfaces to the Series II Cell Site 11-22Voice Trunks from the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) 11-22Time Division Multiplexed Buses 11-22TDM Bus Operation 11-22 TDM Bus Addresses 11-24■TDM Bus Communications: the Archangel/Angel Concept 11-26Angel 11-27Archangel 11-27■Sanity And Control Interface 11-28■NPE and SNPE 11-31■Synchronization of the Cell Site to the MSC 11-32TDMCKSEL 11-36TDMCKFAIL 11-36TDMCLK 11-36TDMFR 11-36TDMSYNC1 11-36TDMSYNC2 11-36■Mobile Switching Center (MSC) to Cell Site Communications 11-37■ DS1, DFI, and CAT Circuit Descriptions 11-38DS1 (TN171) Circuit Description 11-38 DFI (TN3500) Circuit Description 11-38 DFI (TN1713B) Circuit Operation 11-40■ DFI Initialization Message for T1 Operation 11-42D4 or ESF Framing 11-42ZCS or B8ZS Line Format 11-46Line-length Compensation Setting 11-46Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB Control 11-46Select Synchronization Reference 11-47Specify Idle Code 11-47■DFI Initialization Message for E1 Operation 11-48CEPT Framing with or without CRC-4 Error Checking 11-48CCS or CAS Signaling Mode 11-48HDB3 or Transparent Line Format 11-50
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-3Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsEnable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB Control 11-50Select Synchronization Reference 11-50Select Idle Code 11-50DFI Network-Update Talk Message 11-50DFI Network-Update Listen Message 11-50■DFI Status Indicators 11-51Red LED 11-51Yellow LED 11-51Green LED 11-51■CAT (TN170) Circuit Description 11-52■Bus Clock Generation and Monitoring for the TDM Bus 11-55■Maintenance Tone Generation 11-56Maintenance Tone Detection and Measurement 11-57■CAT Status Indicators 11-58Red LED 11-58Green LED 11-58■Automatic Recovery Actions 11-59■Hardware Error Handling Strategy 11-60Immediate Action 11-60All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis 11-60Single Time-period Analysis 11-60Fail/Pass Analysis 11-60Leaky Bucket Analysis 11-61■RCC Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions 11-62■DS1/DFI Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions 11-63■ DS1/DFI and T1 Errors—Detailed Description 11-64Loss Of Signal (LOS) 11-64Blue Alarm 11-64Red Alarm 11-64Major Alarm 11-65Yellow Alarm 11-65■Fan Alarms 11-66Preamp Fan 11-66LineariZeR Fan Procedure 11-66Major Alarm 11-66Minor Alarm 11-67
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsLAU Fan Procedure 11-67Major Alarm 11-67Minor Alarm 11-67Measuring the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) Fan Voltage 11-67■DS1 Errors 11-68Minor Alarm 11-68Misframe Count 11-68■DFI and E1 Errors - Detailed Description 11-69Loss Of Signal (LOS) 11-69Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) 11-69Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA) 11-69Loss of Multiframe Alignment (LMA) 11-7010e-3 Error-ratio Alarm 11-70Remote Frame Alarm (RFA) 11-70Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA) 11-7110e-6 Error-Ratio Alarm 11-71Slip Count 11-71■CAT Hardware Errors and Recovery Actions 11-72Call-Processing Errors and Recovery Actions 11-72Diversity Imbalance Errors and Recovery Actions 11-72Manual Recovery Actions 11-73
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-5Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsIntroductionThe Series II Cell Site (See Figure 11-1) includes controllers, radios, wideband linear amplifiers, antennas, and associated equipment for setting up and completing cellular calls. It can support AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA simultaneously through the same wideband linear amplifier and antennas.Hardware elements common to AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA are the linear amplifier frames (LAFs), the antenna interface frames (AIFs), and the hardware units resident in the RCF (See Figure 11-2). The hardware units resident in the radio channel frames (RCFs) are described in the following paragraphs.Figure 11-1. Series II Cell Site ArchitectureRadio Control Complex (RCC) The RCC (See Figure 11-2) provides control of the Cell Site equipment and performs call processing in conjunction with the ECP complex. Specifically, the RCC performs the following tasks:■Manages radio resources and speech trunks■Gathers statistical information about the operation of the cell for network management■Maintains the service status of hardware and software entities within the cellTX TXTX TXRXPrimaryRadioChannelFrame 0(RCF0)RadioChannelFrame 1(RCF1)Growth GrowthRadioChannelFrame 2(RCF2)AntennaInterfaceFrame 0(AIF0)AntennaInterfaceFrame 1(AIF1)FacilitiesInterfaceFrame(FIF)LinearAmplifierFrame 0(LAF0)LinearAmplifierFrame 1(LAF1)Primary Growth Primary GrowthRX 0 RX 1TXRadio Frame SetDS-1VoiceandDataLinks
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections■Monitors subordinate hardware devices for detected faults■Performs diagnostic tests on the Cell Site equipmentThe Radio Control Complex (RCC) controls the entire Radio Frame Set (RFS). The RCC is fully redundant and uses two identical processors, called RCC 0 and RCC 1, as shown in Figure 11-2. Normally, one processor is active and one is standby. Each processor contains a memory, Network Control Interfaces (NCIs) to control the TDM buses, a Communications Processor Interface (CPI), an alarm interface, and a system bus which connects all circuit packs. An update bus interconnects the two processors within the RCC. Series II processors have improved speed and memory capacity. The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."The RCC also provides the interface to pass Cell Site alarms to the MSC. These alarms include hardware alarms/power alarms, fire and intrusion alarms, and environmental alarms. Alarms are monitored by the alarm interface circuits located in the RCC shelf of the primary Radio Control Frame (RCF). They include the following: ■12 internal frame alarms ■18 user-assigned alarms ■12 frame alarms from each growth frame ■6 circuit alarms from the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF) ■Status alarms from each Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) in the Linear amplifier Frame (LAFs) All the user-assigned and the AIF alarms are connected to the primary RCF by one connector. The status of the alarms originating in the LACs is scanned periodically and alarm data is transmitted to the P-RCF by a dedicated connector.Digital Signal (DS1) Units DS1 units perform serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 lines and the one or two time-division multiplexed (TDM) buses that connect the primary RCF to the growth RCFs. The DS1 units provide the T1 (1544 kbit/s) connectivity to the DCS. The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) UnitsThe DFI unit performs serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 lines and the one or two TDM buses that connect the primary RCF to the growth RCFs. A DFI may reside in any slot reserved for the DS1.Unlike the DS1, which can terminate only one T1 line, the DFI can terminate up to two T1 lines, although only one termination is currently supported. In addition, the DFI can be configured to terminate E1 (2048 kbit/s) lines.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-7Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsClock And Tone (CAT) Units The CAT unit generates the clock signals for the one or two TDM buses that connect the primary RCF to the growth RCFs. The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."Radio Frame Set A radio frame set consists of a primary RCF and up to two growth RCFs. A radio frame set is capable of accommodating up to 14 DS1 or DFI units, four CAT units, 200 AMPS radio channel units (RCUs) or single-board RCUs (SBRCUs) (includes setup, locate, and voice radios), and one AMPS radio test unit (RTU).Figure 11-2. Radio Frame Set Architecture and Bus StructureCAT(2 CATs)12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCUInterconnectionPanel Assembly12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCUInterconnectionPanel AssemblyRCC0 RCC1Primary—RCF0 Growth—RCF1 Growth—RCF28 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCU12 RCUTDM0TDM1TDM1InterconnectionPanel AssemblyUpdateBusMemAFI CPUSystem Bus 0RCC1RCC0T11 RTUShelf 0Shelf 1FansShelf 3Shelf 4Shelf 5Shelf 2NCI1RCU(≤104 RCUs)RTUCPI NCI0CAT (2 CATs)Note: Cat units are redundant for both TDM0 and TDM1.DS1(≤7 DS1s)DS1T1 DS1(≤7 DS1s)DS1TDM0TDM1RCU(≤96 RCUs)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsA radio frame set can also accommodate TDMA digital radio units (DRUs, EDRUs) and a TDMA radio test unit (TRTU). A radio frame set can hold up to 96 DRUs. The maximum number of EDRUs that can be installed in a radio frame set has yet to be determined.Any combination of RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, and EDRUs can reside in the primary RCF or in a growth RCF with the following constraint: no more than five EDRUs are allowed in the same radio shelf due to DC power limitations. All four radio types can sit side-by-side in the same radio shelf. The TRTU, when installed, sits right next to the RTU in the radio test shelf. The DRU occupies two adjoining RCU slots, the EDRU occupies one RCU slot, and the TRTU occupies two adjoining RTU slots.CDMA radios are installed in their own growth RCF, which is designed to house 12 CDMA radios—two (redundant) radios per shelf. (One CDMA radio is active and one is standby). CDMA radios cannot be installed in the primary RCF, nor can they be intermixed with RCUs, SBRCUs, DRUs, or EDRUs in the same growth RCF. Since there can be up to two growth RCFs in a radio frame set, the Series II Cell Site can accommodate up to 24 CDMA radios.A radio frame set consists of at most three RCF frames: a primary RCF and one or two growth RCFs. One or both of the growth RCFs may be CDMA growth frames.The plug-in units, or circuit boards, are physically located by shelf and slot numbers. Slot numbers are indicated at various points along the horizontal run.A Radio Frame Set (RFS) consists of at least a primary Radio Channel Frame (RCF 0) and a maximum of two "growth" RCFs (RCF 1 and RCF 2). All RCFs contain 6 radio shelves, shelves 0 through 5. The entire RFS is controlled by the Radio Control Complex (RCC), which is located in the uppermost shelf (Shelf 0) of the P-RCF. In the P-RCF, shelves 1, 2, 4, and 5 can each support 12 Radio Channel Units (RCUs). Shelf 3 of the P-RCF contains the TDMA Radio Test Unit (TRTU), required to test the radio units, and therefore can only house up to 8 RCUs. Altogether, RCF 0 can house 56 RCUs or Enhanced Digital Radio Units (EDRUs) (which, like the RCU use only 1 radio slot apiece) (12 x 4 + 8); or RCF 0 can house 28 Digital Radio Units (DRUs), which use 2 radio slots apiece. Each of the Growth RCFs is capable of accommodating up to a total of 12 RCUs or EDRUs on each of its 6 radio shelves, or 72 RCUs or EDRUs apiece (12 x 6); or a Growth RCF can house 36 DRUs. TDM bus 0 connects all the radio shelves in RCF 0 and the 4 upper shelves, 0 thru 4, in RCF 1. That makes the number of radio slots covered by TDM bus 0 equal to 104. That many slots could house 104 RCUs or EDRUs or 52 DRUs.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-9Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsTDM bus 1 Connects the 2 lowest radio shelves in RCF 1 and all the radio shelves in RCF 2. That makes the number of radio slots covered by TDM bus 1 equal to 96. That many slots could house 96 RCUs or EDRUs or 48 DRUs. The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."The number of radios and/or radio channels that TDM buses 0 and 1 support may or may not be equal to the number of radio units that physically fit into those shelves that are covered by either of the buses. RCF Architecture and Bus Structure The RCC (See Figure 11-2), which resides on the uppermost shelf (shelf 0) of the primary RCF, consists of two identical controllers. One controller is active (on-line) and one is standby (off-line).System busEach RCC controller makes use of a dedicated system bus over which all of the units that make up the controller communicate. The two system buses (0 and 1) are embedded in the RCC backplane.Update busAn update bus interconnects the two RCC controllers. It is over this bus that the standby controller obtains information from the active controller so that it is constantly informed of the status of the operating parameters. This mode of operation allows an immediate switch from the active-controller side to the mate-controller side with a minimum of lost control information in the event of a controller failure. The update bus is embedded in the RCC backplane.TDM busesThere are two TDM buses in the primary and growth RCFs (See Figure 11-3): TDM bus 0 (TDM0) and TDM bus 1 (TDM1). The TDM buses provide the transfer paths for both digital-voice and signaling data (call processing or operation and maintenance messages) within the RCFs. The TDM buses communicate with the ECP over BX.25 data links (signaling channels). The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."The TDM buses interconnect the RCC with the other units in the primary and growth RCFs. The interconnections are accomplished via AYD4 paddleboards (circuit boards) that mount onto the wiring side of certain backplane pinfields. Each of these paddleboards has a connector that provides termination to flat ribbon cable, thus providing the means to complete the necessary interconnections. In addition, all TDM buses are terminated via AYD3 termination paddleboards that mount onto the wiring side of certain backplane pinfields.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsNOTE:All TDM bus inter-shelf and inter-frame bus cables should be installed with the pin 1 edge upward. The pin 1 edge is denoted by a red colored stripe. An upside-down TDM bus cable can reduce the effective signal ground between shelves and frames and distort the TDMSYNC1 signal, which provides a reference signal used to lock the T1/E1 span to the TDM bus. Figure 11-3. Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 1 of 3)01 345678910111213141508 0902 03 04 05 06 07PCURCU12VPCU5VCAT200 01 0A 0B 0CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2161701 345678910111213141518 1912 13 14 15 16 17PCURCU12VPCU5VCAT210 11 1A 1B 1CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2161701 3456789 10 1112130F2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7EPCURCU12VPCU5VDS120E 1E 1F 2FRCURCURCURCURCURTURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1141501 345678910111213141528 2922 23 24 25 26 27PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1220 21 2A 2B 2CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 345678910111213141538 3932 33 34 35 36 37PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1230 31 3A 3B 3CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN116170 1 3456789 10 111213141516171819 20 21 225D6D7D0D1D5D 4D3D2D1D0D 4DPCUAFINCI5V1GRWTHGRWTHGRWTHNCI0CPIMEMCPUPCUAFINCI5V1GRWTHGRWTHGRWTHNCI0CPIMEMCPUDS1RCC 1RCC 02GRWTHGRWTH7D6D 2D3D 7FKEY: = AYD4 = AYD3FRONT VIEW OF PRIMARY RCF—RCF0SLOT ADDRRCCSHELF 0RCUSHELF 1RCUSHELF 2RTUSHELF 3RCUSHELF 4RCUSHELF 5SLOT NUMTDM022W30122W302TDM0BBM1/BBN1BBM1/BBN1BBM1/BBN1BBM1/BBN122W30022W304TDM022W303BATDM0TDM1TDM0ABTO/ FROM SHEET 2= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTION
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-11Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections.Figure 11-4. Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 2 of 3)TO/ FROM SHEET 1/ 30 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1578 7972 73 74 75 76 77PCURCU12VPCU5V270 71 7A 7B 7CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN116170 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1558 5952 53 54 55 56 57PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1250 51 5A 5B 5CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN116170 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1568 6962 63 64 65 66 67PCURCU12VPCU5V260 61 6A 6B 6CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN116170 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1548 4942 43 44 45 46 47PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1240 41 4A 4B 4CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN116170 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1508 0902 03 04 05 06 07PCURCU12VPCU5VCAT200 01 0A 0B 0CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 3 45678910 11 12 13 14 1518 1912 13 14 15 16 17PCURCU12VPCU5VCAT210 11 1A 1B 1CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN11617KEY: = AYD4 = AYD3FRONT VIEW OF FIRST GROWTH RCF—RCF1RCUSHELF 0RCUSHELF 1RCUSHELF 2RCUSHELF 3RCUSHELF 4RCUSHELF 5SLOT NUM22W30722W30622W305TDM122W309SLOT ADDRTDM0TDM0TDM122W310ABB CACTDM122 22= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTIONW311
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-12 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-5. Physical View of TDM Buses (Sheet 3 of 3)If the radio frame set consists of only the primary RCF, AYD3 termination paddleboards (instead of AYD4 paddleboards) are installed on the wiring side of RCF0 shelf 0, slots 15 and 21.01 345678910111213141558 5952 53 54 55 56 57PCURCU12VPCU5V250 51 5A 5B 5CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 3 45678910 11 12 13 14 1538 3932 33 34 35 36 37PCURCU12VPCU5V230 31 3A 2B 3CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 345678910111213141548 4942 43 44 45 46 47PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1240 41 4A 4B 4CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 345678910111213141528 2922 23 24 25 26 27PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1220 21 2A 2B 2CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 345678910111213141568 6962 63 64 65 66 67PCURCU12VPCU5VDS1260 61 6A 6B 6CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN1161701 345678910111213141578 7972 73 74 75 76 77PCURCU12VPCU5V270 71 7A 7B 7CRCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCURCUBBN2BBN1BBN11617KEY: = AYD4 = AYD3FRONT VIEW OF SECOND GROWTH RCF—RCF2RCUSHELF 0RCUSHELF 1RCUSHELF 2RCUSHELF 3RCUSHELF 4RCUSHELF 5SLOT NUM22W309TDM1SLOT ADDR22W30722W30522W30622W308TDM1TDM1TDM1TDM1CTO/ FROM SHEET 2C22= TDM-BUS SLOT CONNECTIONW312
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-13Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsIf the radio frame set consists of only the primary RCF and a growth RCF and assuming that shelf 4 and/or shelf 5 of RCF1 is populated with radio equipment, an AYD3 termination paddleboard is installed on the wiring side of RCF1 shelf 5, slot 14. In addition, to generate clock signals for TDM1, redundant CAT units are installed in RCF1 shelf 4, slot 14, and RCF1 shelf 5, slot 14.Each controller contains the following set of plug-in units:■One CPU - The core processor (CPU) unit is a 32-bit Motorola MC68020 processing element.■One MEM - The 8-megabyte memory (MEM) unit provides the volatile main memory resource for the CPU.Applications in Release 9.0 and later require 8-megabytes of memory (as opposed to 4-megabytes of memory). The 8-megabytes of memory must be realized by installing one 8-megabyte TN1710 memory unit in RCC0 and one in RCC1. (A memory board has no pin connections to the TDM bus.)■One AFI - The alarms and FITS* interface (AFI) unit monitors alarm sensors and reports adverse conditions to the CPU.■One or Two CPIs - The communications processor interface (CPI) unit provides BX.25 communication between the CPU and the ECP. One CPI is required for TDM0, and one CPI is optional for TDM1.■One or Two NCIs - The network control interface (NCI) unit provides the communication interface between the CPU on the system bus and the TDM-bus client units on the TDM buses. One NCI is required for each TDM bus.The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."* FITS, for Factory Installation and Test System, is a Lucent Technologies test set that can connect to a special connector accessible through the faceplate of the AFI. At initial frame installation, FITS is used to download Cell Site translations and initiate diagnostic tests.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-14 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsData Link and VoicePath ConnectionsAll data link and voice path connections (See Figure 11-6) between the MSC and its associated Cell Sites are based on the connection topology specified in the translations (system-configuration parameters). The Cell Site radios are connected to their appropriate DS1s or DFIs and T1 trunks (64-kbit/s channels or DS0s) in accordance with the translations.Cell Site translations can be set or changed from the ECP or OMP; initially, they are maintained in the ECP’s application data bases and then downloaded to the Cell Site RCC. Refer to the Data Base Update Manual (401-610-036) for a complete listing of Cell Site translations.The figure shows a data link connection path between the MSC and a Cell Site RCC:CDN ‹ CSN ‹ DFI* ‹ TSIU ‹ DFI ‹ FIF ‹ DS1 ‹ CPI ‹ CPUA Cell Site data link is a static (dedicated) connection path from end to end. All hardware, T1 trunks, and TDM bus timeslots in the path are assigned statically (“nailed up”) in accordance with the translations.The figure also shows a digital-voice connection path between the PSTN and a Cell Site radio:PSTN ‹ DFI ‹ TSIU ‹ DFI ‹ FIF ‹ DS1 ‹ RCUA digital-voice connection path is static except for the connection between the PSTN and the Cell Site T1 trunk (that is, the connection through the DCS). That connection is set up and torn down dynamically by the call processing and data base node (CDN); it is NOT specified in the translations. The CDN receives a call setup message from the PSTN or Cell Site via a DCS or Cell Site data link. The CDN decides how to complete the call and then sends the appropriate messages to the DCS and the targeted Cell Site to set up the call.T1/E1 Communications The digital-voice and signaling communications between the MSC and the RCC at the Cell Site are based on a T1/DS1 or E1/CEPT† line interface. The T1 line interface is the lowest level in the hierarchy of the North American T-carrier digital transmission facility.* The DFI at the switch is physically different but functionally equivalent to the DFI at the Cell Site.†CEPT stands for Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications Administrations. CEPT, CEPT-1, and E1 are equivalent terms.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-15Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-6. Data Link and Voice Paths—ExampleThe DS1 and DFI hardware units are the carrier line interface circuits at the Cell Site. The DS1 can terminate one T1 line. The DFI can terminate two T1 lines or two E1 lines, although only one termination is currently supported. That is, of the two line interface ports on the DFI—port 0 and port 1, only port 0 is currently used to terminate a carrier line.SERIES II Cell SiteVoiceData LinkT1 LinesSystem BusCPITDM1RCF0RCF1, 2TDM0RCURPCN5ESS®-2000 Switch DCSECP CNI/ IMSOMPCDN CSNTo/FromPSTNECP ComplexDRUNCI0NCI1CPUDFICSNDFIDFICell SiteDATA LINKS(BX.25)MSCFIFDynamicallyAssigned PathDEFINITIONS:CDN Call processing and Data base Node (Cabinet)CNI Common Network InterfaceCPI Communications Processor Interface (Board)CPU Core Processor (Board)CSN Cell Site Node (Cabinet)DCS Digital Cellular SwitchDFI Digital Facilities Interface (Board)DRU Digital Radio Unit (Board—TDMA Radio)ECP Executive Cellular ProcessorFIF Facilities Interface Frame (Cabinet)IMS Interprocess Message SwitchMSC Mobile Switching CenterNCI Network Control Interface (Board)OMP Operations and Management PlatformPSTN Public Switched Telephone NetworkRCF Radio Channel FrameRCU Radio Channel Unit (Board—AMPS Radio)RPCN Ring Peripheral Controller Node (Cabinet)SM Switching Module (Cabinet)CDNDFITSIUTSIU
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-16 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsA Cell Site may connect to T1 lines or E1 lines but not a mixture of both. The DS1 and DFI can support the all-T1 Cell Site configuration. Only DFIs can support the all-E1 Cell Site configuration.T1 Line InterfaceAs shown in Figure 11-7, a T1/DS1 frame consists of twenty-four 8-bit timeslots, or channels, plus one F bit (for detection of frame boundaries and the transport of additional information), resulting in a 193-bit frame. The 193-bit frame, which is repeated every 125 ms—8000 times per second, yields a line rate of 1544 kbit/s. Each channel, referred to as a DS0, operates at a 64-kbit/s rate.A T1 line is a balanced, full-duplex digital transmission line: one twisted pair to transmit data and one twisted pair to receive data. It must be terminated at both ends in its characteristic impedance, that is, 120 ohms. A T1 line can accommodate 24 digital-voice communication channels or a combination of digital-voice and signaling channels.E1 Line InterfaceAs shown in Figure 11-8, an E1/CEPT frame consists of thirty-two 8-bit timeslots, or channels, of which one channel, timeslot 0 (TS0), is reserved for framing and alarm information. The 256-bit frame, which is repeated every 125 ms—8000 times per second, yields a line rate of 2048 kbit/s. Each channel operates at a 64-kbit/s rate.An E1 line is a balanced or unbalanced, full-duplex digital transmission line: one twisted pair or coaxial cable to transmit data and one twisted pair or coaxial cable to receive data. It must be terminated at both ends in its characteristic impedance, that is, 120 ohms for twisted pair and 75 ohms for coaxial cable. An E1 line can accommodate 31 digital-voice communication channels or a combination of digital-voice and signaling channels.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-17Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsLine Interface Connections at the CellThe T1 line interface at the cell is 120-ohm twisted pair. The E1 line interface at the cell is optionally configurable for 120-ohm twisted pair or 75-ohm coaxial cable, but not both.The channel service units (CSUs) in the FIF provide the electrical interface between the T1 lines and the DS1s/DFIs in the RCF. Two 14-pin, D-type female connectors provide the 120-ohm twisted-pair connector interface at the primary or growth RCF.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-18 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-7. T1/DS1 Transmission Format and RCF TDM Bus Transmission FormatFR0 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR5 FR7998 FR7999CH1 CH2 CH3 FR3 CH22 CH23 CH2401234567FRAMESTIMESLOTSBITS1 sec(1,544,000 BITS)5.18 µs(8 BITS)125 µs(193 BITS—192 DATA BITS + 1 F BIT)0.6477 µs01234567FR0 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR5 FR7998 FR7999FRAMESTIMESLOTS1 sec(2,048,000 TIMESLOTS)125 µs(256 TIMESLOTS)0.5 µs0 1 2 251 252 253 254 255DEDICATED TOSUPERVISION ANDCONTROL(SEE NOTE)DEDICATED TODIGITAL-VOICE/SIGNALINGTRANSPORTNOTE: FOR TDM0 AND TDM1, 251 TIMESLOTS ON HIGHWAY A AND HIGHWAY B (502 TIMESLOTS TOTAL) ARE AVAILABLE FOR DIGITAL-VOICE AND SIGNALING TRANSPORT.B. TDM BUS TRANSMISSION FORMATA. T1/DS1 TRANSMISSION FORMAT(CHANNELS)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-19Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-8. E1/CEPT Transmission Format and RCF TDM Bus Transmission FormatTIMESLOTS(CHANNELS)FR0 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR5 FR7998 FR7999TS0 TS1 TS2 FR3 TS29 TS30 TS310 1 2 3 4 5 6 7FRAMESBITS1 sec(2,048,000 BITS)3.91 µs(8 BITS)125 µs(256 BITS)0.5 µs0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7FR0 FR1 FR2 FR3 FR4 FR5 FR7998 FR7999FRAMESTIMESLOTS1 sec(2,048,000 TIMESLOTS)125 µs(256 TIMESLOTS)0.5 µs0 1 2 251 252 253 254 255DEDICATED TOSUPERVISION ANDCONTROL(SEE NOTE)DEDICATED TODIGITAL-VOICE/SIGNALINGTRANSPORTNOTE: FOR TDM0 AND TDM1, 251 TIMESLOTS ON HIGHWAY A AND HIGHWAY B (502 TIMESLOTS TOTAL) ARE AVAILABLE FOR DIGITAL-VOICE AND SIGNALING TRANSPORT.B. TDM BUS TRANSMISSION FORMATA. E1/CEPT TRANSMISSION FORMAT
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-20 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsCustomer-provided network termination units (NTUs)* provide the electrical interface between the E1 lines and the DFIs in the RCF. The same two 14-pin, D-type receptacle described above provide the 120-ohm twisted-pair connector interface at the primary or growth RCF. An additional piece of equipment, referred to as a balun (for balanced/unbalanced), is needed to accommodate the 75-ohm coaxial-cable interface. A balun is an impedance-matching device used to connect balanced twisted-pair cabling with unbalanced coaxial cable. Coaxial cables from the NTU connect to BNC connectors on the balun, and twisted-pair cabling from the balun connects to the two 14-pin connectors on the primary or growth RCF.* To realize the NTU function, Lucent Technologies is currently testing an E-SMART® plug-in card developed by Kentrox Industries. The E-SMART card would replace the T-SMART® card in the T-SMART CSU. (The T-SMART CSU is one of two types of CSUs that may be installed in the FIF.) More information on this feature will be supplied when it becomes available.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-21Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsData Link ConfigurationsOne BX.25 data link, or signaling channel, is required between the RCC and the ECP; two data links are needed to achieve increased reliability. The latter is best accommodated via two carrier lines connected to two separate DS1s/DFIs, with one BX.25 data link in each line. This arrangement ensures that no single point failure will reduce service capability by more than 50 percent.Data link configurations are established using the ECP DNLD: CELL a,DLOPTS command. This command is used to establish any one of the following data link configurations:One DS1/DFI Unit and One Data Link The DS1/DFI is in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (logical unit DS1 0 as seen at the ECP); the data link is carried in channel 24 of the attached carrier line.One DS1/DFI Unit and Two Data LinksThe DS1/DFI is in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (DS1 0 as seen at the ECP); the primary data link (DL 0) is carried in channel 24 of the attached carrier line, and the secondary data link (DL 1) is carried in channel 13 of the attached carrier line.Two DS1/DFI Units and Two Data LinksOne DS1/DFI is in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (DS1 0 as seen at the ECP), and one is in shelf 4, slot 14, of the primary RCF (DS1 1 as seen at the ECP); DL 0 is carried in channel 24 of the carrier line attached to DS1 0; DL 1 is carried in channel 24 of the carrier line attached to DS1 1.In the current RC/V implementation, the physical unit mappings for logical units DS1 0 and DS1 1 are fixed (as stated above) and cannot be changed by the user. For a Cell Site configured with two data links, both data links are active. DL 0 carries call-processing messages, and DL 1 carries maintenance and locate request messages. If one data link fails or is placed out-of-service, the other data link must carry all of the message traffic between the RCC and the ECP; call-processing messages have priority over maintenance and locate request messages.Remote Data Link Reconfiguration Release 4.3 supports two ways to update data link parameters: by Factory Installation Test System (FITS) and by cell data links (that is, from the Mobile Switching Center (MSC)). While changing data link parameters from the MSC, the cell remains in service. However, at least one Core Processor Unit (CPU) must have the correct current data link options to keep the Cell Site in service. The new data link parameters are downloaded to the inactive (mate) CPU. A Radio Control Complex (RCC), that is, Cell Site Controller side switch is then made, and the parameters are copied from the new active, updated CPU to the new mate CPU.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-22 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections External Interfaces to the Series II Cell SiteVoice Trunks from the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) Cell data links from the Interprocess Message Switch (IMS) ring are connected to the TDM buses by integrated Digital Cross-Connect (DSX-1) interfaces. Data links from the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) are connected to TDM bus 0. The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."The TDM buses provide the paths for control and data transfer within the RFS. Within the RFS there may be up to 200 RCUs (195 can be used for voice), 1 RTU, 14 Digital Service 1 (DS1) or Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) boards, 4 Clock And Tone (CAT) boards, and the number of RF switch modules, transmit combiners, receive dividers, and power supply boards required to handle the RFS configuration used. Time Division Multiplexed Buses All external interfaces (that is, T1 or E1 lines from the MSC) are connected to the RCF TDM buses via the DS1/DFI interfaces. (Data links from the MSC are connected to TDM0 via DS1 0 and DS1 1). The TDM buses provide the paths for control and data transfer within the primary RCF and any attached growth RCF(s).The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."TDM Bus OperationThe TDM buses, TDM0 and TDM1, are independently synchronized to individual carrier lines connected to the cell; those lines are specified by Cell Site system software. The DS1/DFI serving a synchronization line continually extracts a frame-sync signal (8 kHz) from the carrier line and passes it to the active CAT unit. Using the 8-kHz signal as the sync reference, the active CAT generates two system clocks for the TDM bus: a 2048-kHz timeslot clock and an 8-kHz framing clock. Each TDM bus operates at 2048 kHz with a frame rate of 8 kHz.A TDM bus consists of two 8-bit highways (highway A and highway B); each highway provides 256 timeslots. (Each highway requires eight wires and carries eight bits per timeslot.) For both TDM0 and TDM1, the first five timeslots on highway A and highway B—timeslots 0 through 4—are dedicated for control, and the rest are used to carry user information. At any given time, only one of the highways (highway A or highway B) is actively used to carry control information. Timeslots 0 through 4 are referred to as the TDM bus control channel.The TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-23Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-9. TDM-Bus Interface Circuitry for the NCI—TDM Bus ArchangelThe updating of firmware (software stored in updatable non-volatile memory—NVM) to TDM-bus client units is accomplished through the TDM bus, specifically, through the TDM bus control channel. TDM-bus client units having updatable non-volatile memory are the RCU, SBRCU, RTU, DRU, EDRU, TRTU, CCC, BIU, SCT, and CRTUi.TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."RED LED(FAILURE)BUSTRANSCEIVERSDUAL-PORTRAM(8-Bit Micro-Processor)SAKI(Bus SanityAnd ControlInterface)ADDRESSLATCH EPROM(BOOT)TDM CLOCKS62ADDR (15)ADDR/ DATA (8)TO/ FROMSYSTEMBUSADDR (8)TDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUS.THE 8-BIT MICROPROCESSOR (ARCHANGEL) CONTROLS WHICH TDM BUS (A OR B) CONNECTS TO THE SAKI.6NOTES:1.2.ANAEA(MEMORY)CIRCUITSADDRLATCHENABLECLOCKMONITOR/CONTROLADDR (11)ON NCI236(NOTE 2)2ADDRDATADATA (8)DATA (8)RESETTX/ RXControl(HardwiredSlot ADDR)7TDM BUS INTErfACETDM0/ 1 BUSAB(NOTE 1)TDMCKFAILTDMCKSELA(+5 VDC(ARCHANGELMODE)FROMSIDE ACTIVE2ADDR (10)DATA (16)3ACLK SRC SELARCHANGEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-24 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsThe CPU and CPI also have updatable non-volatile memory; the updating of CPU or CPI firmware is accomplished through the system bus.For the AMPS and TDMA access technologies, one full-duplex timeslot on the TDM bus, that is, one timeslot for transmission and one for reception, can carry one digital-voice channel. (The TDM bus interface for the RCU or SBRCU is a single full-duplex timeslot, and the TDM bus interface for the DRU or EDRU is three full-duplex timeslots.) For the CDMA access technology, four full-duplex timeslots on the TDM bus, called a packet pipe, can carry up to 14 digital-voice channels* for 8-kbit/s voice encoders (vocoders). (The TDM bus interface for the CCC is a single packet pipe.) The timeslots are assigned statically (“nailed up”) to the various TDM-bus client units in accordance with the Cell Site’s translations data base.TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up." TDM Bus AddressesSupervisory and control information is passed from the CPU to the various TDM-bus clients via the TDM0 and TDM1 control channels. To control individual units selectively on a TDM bus, a unique 7-bit address is assigned to each slot position served by that bus. The figure identifies the 7-bit addresses—in hexadecimal format—for the various slot positions within the primary and growth RCFs.The pin designations for the slot address are BA0 (LSB) through BA6 (MSB). The logic values for BA0 through BA6 are unique for each of the slot positions connected to the TDM bus. The 7-bit address for a slot position is established by grounding an address pin for a logic 0, and leaving an address pin unconnected for a logic 1. The 7-pin address for a slot position is realized only when a unit is installed in that slot position: each of the seven address pins is connected to a pull-up resistor on the installed unit.The backplanes for the RCU shelves are identical; therefore, each RCU shelf has an associated 4-pole switch used to select unique logic values for the upper slot-address bits BA4, BA5, and BA6 (See Table 11-1, and Table 11-2). The switches are soldered to 8-pin paddleboard connectors that mount onto the wiring side (rear side) of the backplane pinfield at slot 14 (P14).TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."* In CDMA (and TDMA) terminology, a digital-voice channel is usually referred to as a traffic channel.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-25Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections Table 11-1. Switch Settings for RCU Shelves in First Growth RCF—RCF1Shelf Number Switch Position Settings*12340Don’t Care OFF ON ON1Don’t Care OFF ON OFF2Don’t Care OFF OFF ON3Don’t Care OFF OFF OFF4Don’t Care ON ON ON5Don’t Care ON ON OFF* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1Table 11-2. Switch Settings for RCU Shelves in Second Growth RCF—RCF2Shelf Number Switch Position Settings*12340Don’t Care ON OFF ON1Don’t Care ON OFF OFF2Don’t Care OFF ON ON3Don’t Care OFF ON OFF4Don’t Care OFF OFF ON5Don’t Care OFF OFF OFF* ON = Logic 0, OFF = Logic 1
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-26 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsTDM Bus Communications: the Archangel/Angel ConceptThis section lists and briefly describes the various hardware devices that form the TDM bus interface and perform the TDM bus communications. The NCI contains the primary TDM bus processor, or archangel (See Figure 11-9), through which all other TDM bus processors, or angels (See Figure 11-10), communicate. Angel processors reside on the TDM bus client units.Figure 11-10. TDM-Bus Interface Circuitry for the CPI—TDM Bus AngelBUSTRANSCEIVERS(8-BIT MICRO-PROCESSOR)SAKI(BUS SANITYAND CONTROLINTErfACE)ADDRESSLATCHTDM CLOCKSADDR LATCH ENABLEEAADDR (11)ADDR/ DATA (8)TDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUS.NOTE:ANASRAMADDR (11)3DUAL-PORTRAMADDR (8)3223222TO/ FROMOTHERCIRCUITSON CPIPORT 0PORT 1GRD(ANGELMODE)DATA (8)DATA (8)RESET+5 VDCRED LED(FAILURE)TX/ RXCONTROL(HARDWIREDSLOT ADDR)7TDM BUS INTErfACETDM0 BUSAB(NOTE)2ADDR (10)DATA (16)512-kHz CLKNPE(PARALLELTO SERIALCONVERTER,HAS FOURSERIAL I/OCHANNELS)ANGEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-27Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsAngel An angel (See Figure 11-10) is an 8-bit microprocessor that serves as the TDM-bus interface controller for a TDM bus client unit. On some units, it also serves as the main processor for the unit.Archangel An archangel (See Figure 11-9) is an 8-bit microprocessor on NCI0 and NCI1 that passes messages back and forth between the CPU and the TDM bus client units (angels). NCI0 interfaces with TDM0, and NCI1 interfaces with TDM1. The NCI is the distribution point for all downlink messages (messages from the CPU to the TDM bus client units) as well as the focal point for all uplink messages (messages from the TDM bus client units to the CPU). In addition to the transfer of messages, the archangel microprocessor monitors client-unit (angel) sanity and runs periodic audits on the client units under control of the CPU.A communication sequence begins when the CPU requests an activity scan of all client units. In response to an activity scan, the client units that require uplink message transmission transmit their slot addresses to the NCI. Next, the archangel microprocessor grants permission to each client unit to enable uplink message transmission. When the complete message is received, the archangel microprocessor loads the message to the dual-port RAM for uplink transmission to the CPU.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-28 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsSanity And Control InterfaceThe sanity and control interface (SAKI) (See Figure 11-11), a Lucent Technologies custom device, provides a synchronous communications link between the archangel microprocessor and the angel microprocessors via the TDM bus. The SAKI transfers information to and from the TDM bus control channel—timeslots 0 through 4 of the TDM frame.Each SAKI provides board-address recognition, message buffering, and bus synchronization functions for the archangel/angel microprocessor that it supports.The SAKI can be configured for one of two modes of operation: archangel mode or angel mode. A logic 1 on the SAKI archangel/angel (ANA) input pin corresponds to archangel mode; a logic 0 on ANA corresponds to angel mode.NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."In archangel mode, the SAKI (on the NCI) transmits a slot address followed by whatever message is to be sent to the client unit that has that slot address. It often takes several TDM frames to transmit the complete message to the targeted unit. In the receive direction, the SAKI reads and saves all five control channel timeslots of every TDM frame. Messages are passed to the archangel just as they are when the SAKI is in angel mode.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-29Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections Figure 11-11. SAKI and SNPE InterfaceIn angel mode, the SAKI (on the TDM-bus client units) monitors the TDM bus control channel and extracts and holds any information addressed to its angel microprocessor until the angel microprocessor removes it. The SAKI also transmits information onto the TDM bus control channel on command from its angel microprocessorSanity checks between the archangel and angel microprocessor are routinely performed through the SAKI-angel interface. The SAKI monitors the TDM bus for sanity scans on the TDM bus control channel (directed from the archangel), and reports any scan request to its angel microprocessor. Sanity control is handled by C2(NOTE)BABUSTr a ns c ei v er sADDR DATASNPE 0(ScotchNetworkProcessingElement 0)SAKI(Bus SanityAnd ControlInterface)ANA ADDR/DATATDM CLOCKS 2DFBRESET22EGTDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUSNOTE:D E F G TO/ FROM SHEET 2A B C22P/O TDM BUS INTErfACETDM0/1 BUSDATA (8)DATA (8)TDMSYNC2TDMSYNC12DATA (8)DATA (8)ADDR DATASNPE 1A4(HARDWIREDSLOT ADDR)7
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-30 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnectionsa hardware timer that the angel must reset periodically. If the angel does not reset the timer within the allotted time, the SAKI resets (disables) the angel microprocessor, turns on the on-board red LED (indicating an error on the unit), and reports the loss to the archangel microprocessor.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-31Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsNPE and SNPEThe network processing element (NPE) and SCOTCH network processing element (SNPE), both Lucent Technologies custom devices, perform timeslot exchange between the parallel TDM bus and serial data buses called concentration highways, that is, perform parallel-to-serial and serial-to-parallel conversion of digital-voice data.* They communicate with the TDM bus (highway A, highway B, or both) during timeslots 5 to 255 of the 256-slot TDM frame.Each channel of an NPE or SNPE can be programmed by the angel microprocessor to access two different TDM timeslots: one to carry the channel’s received samples (uplink information) and the other to carry the channel’s transmitted samples (downlink information). When the CPU places a channel in loop-around mode, the channel’s receive timeslot and transmit timeslot are looped together.* The CPI TDM-bus interface circuitry uses the NPE device. Other units, such as the DFI and CCC, use SNPE devices because they provide eight times the capacity of NPE devices. An SNPE has 32 serial I/O channels, and an NPE has four serial I/O channels.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-32 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsSynchronization of the Cell Site to the MSCThe DS1/DFI provides an external clock source used to synchronize all digital-voice and signaling transfers between the carrier lines and the internal TDM buses. The TDM buses, TDM0 and TDM1, are independently synchronized to the MSC via separate DS1/DFI units (See Figure 11-12, and Figure 11-13).NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."Only one of two DS1s/DFIs may provide the external clock source for TDM0. Those units are the DS1/DFI in shelf 3, slot 12, of the primary RCF (DS1 0 as seen at the ECP) and the DS1/DFI in shelf 4, slot 14, of the primary RCF (DS1 1 as seen at the ECP).Similarly, only one of two DS1s/DFIs may provide the external clock source for TDM1. Those units are the first two equipped DS1s/DFIs found by Cell Site system software residing on TDM1. There are occasions when only one DS1/DFI is designated as an external clock source for a TDM bus.Only one DS1 or DFI can be the synchronization reference for a TDM bus at any given time. That unit will have a lighted green LED.Only synchronization of TDM0 will be considered in the following discussion. The two DS1s/DFIs that may provide the external clock source for TDM0 will be referenced by their logical unit numbers, DS1 0 and DS1 1. All concepts applying to TDM0 synchronization will also apply to TDM1 synchronization.For TDM0, a valid synchronization-reference configuration is (1) a carrier line connected to DS1 0, (2) a carrier line connected to DS1 1, or (3) for reliability, both a carrier line connected to DS1 0 and a carrier line connected to DS1 1. In the latter configuration, DS1 0 is the primary synchronization reference, or sync_1, and DS1 1 is the secondary synchronization reference, or sync_2.In the figure, logical units DS1 0 and DS1 1 are realized by the DFI; all hardware units in the figure reside in the primary RCF. For simplicity, no TDM0 bus connection is shown for DS1 1.Initially, when the primary RCF comes on-line, the system attempts to select sync_1 as the synchronization reference. If that source fails (or is not present) and assuming that the DS1/DFI and carrier line associated with sync_2 are operational (that is, DS1 1 is not insane and there is no alarm or only a minor, misframe, slip, or 10e-6 error-ratio alarm on the carrier line), the system will select sync_2 as the new synchronization reference.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-33Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsIf neither sync_1 nor sync_2 is an acceptable synchronization reference, the system will use an internal oscillator as the synchronization reference. That oscillator, referred to as the local reference oscillator or just local oscillator, is located on the CAT unit. It is a free-running oscillator running at the carrier line rate of 2048 kHz. Since it is free running, that is, not locked (synchronized) to the carrier lines, slips1 (which result in the repeat or loss of a frame of incoming data) are bound to occur. For that reason, the fault preventing the use of an external clock source should be isolated and corrected as soon as possible.When a TDM bus is synchronized to the local reference, Cell Site system software attempts to switch to the primary or secondary reference DS!/DFI every five minutes. The switch will only proceed if the primary or secondary reference DS!/DFI is now free of alarms and in the active state.NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."Figure 11-12. Synchronization References for TDM0 and TDM1—ExampleFOR TDM1PRIMARYSYNC REFSYNC REFPRIMARY &SECONDARYFOR TDM0=CATSHELF 0SHELF 1FANSSHELF 3SHELF 4SHELF 5SHELF 2AMPS/TDMA RCF0 AMPS/TDMA RCF1TDM10132TDM0=DS1 OR DFI01FOR TDM1REDUNDANTCAT UNITSFOR TDM0REDUNDANTCAT UNITS8-KHzREF SIG 8-KHzREF SIG
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-34 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsIn the figure, the active (on-line) CPU sends a message to DS1 0 specifying that the 8-kHz signal derived from the T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream be connected to TDMSYNC1. Likewise, the active CPU sends a message to DS1 1 specifying that the 8-kHz signal derived from the T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream be connected to TDMSYNC2. The active CPU also writes the control register of the active NCI0 to specify which of the two CATs is to supply the TDM system clocks. (The NCI uses TDMCKSEL to activate the specified CAT.) And finally, the active CPU sends a message to the active CAT specifying which synchronization reference is to connect to the clock generator circuit.NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-35Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections Figure 11-13. Synchronization of TDM0 to the MSCFor the active CAT, only TDMSYNC1, TDMSYNC2, and the 8-kHz LOC signals are valid choices as the synchronization reference. For the standby (off-line) CAT, only TDMFR is a valid choice as the synchronization reference; on-board hardware forces TDMFR as the synchronization reference to keep the standby clock generator in step with the active clock generator.BUSTRANSCEIVERSP/O DS1 0 (SHELF 3, SLOT 12)TDMSYNC1TDMSYNC2TDMFRTDMCLKTO/ FROMT1_0/ E1_0SAKILINEINTErfACEDEVICE 0ANGELTO/ FROMT1_1/ E1_18-kHz CLOCKDERIVED FROMT1_0/ E1_0BUSTRANSCEIVERSP/O CAT 0 OR CAT 1 (SHELF 1 OR 2, SLOT 14)TDMSYNC2TDMSYNC1TDMFRTDMCLKANGELSAKIBA4 *NCSYNC SOURCEREF SELECTLOCALOSCCLOCKGENERATOR(PHASE LOCKLOOP)8-kHz REF8-kHz LOC÷ BY256(2048kHz)2048 kHz8 kHzBUSTRANSCEIVERSDUAL-PORTRAMCLOCKMONITOR/CONTROLMESSAGESP/O NCI0 (SHELF 0, SLOT 8 OR 13)TDMCKFAILTDMCKSELTDMCLKSIDE ACTIVECLK SRC SELCLK FAIL (2)TDMFRSAKITO/ FROMSYSTEM2BUS 0/1P/O DS1 1 (SHELF 4, SLOT 14)SAME AS DFI ABOVENCLINEINTErfACEDEVICE 1PRIMARY ACCESSCONTROLLER/FRAMER 0PRIMARY ACCESSCONTROLLER/FRAMER 1AYD3TDM0 BUS2ONLINE* BA4 = 0 FOR CAT IN SHELF 1 BA4 = 1 FOR CAT IN SHELF 2BA4 = TDMCKSEL ‘ ACTIVE (ON-LINE) CATCONTROLREGISTER6(NOT USED)ARCH-ANGEL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-36 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsThe signal lines called out in the figure are summarized below:TDMCKSEL TDM clock select. Selects which of the two CAT units is to supply the TDM system clocks. A logic 0 on TDMCKSEL selects CAT 0, while a logic 1 selects CAT 1. The source of TDMCKSEL is the active NCI0, which sets the logic state of the signal either (1) autonomously, if enabled by the active CPU, or (2) as directed by the active CPU.TDMCKFAIL TDM clock failure. When asserted (logic 1), indicates the failure of one or both of the TDM system clocks. The source of TDMCKFAIL is the active NCI0, which asserts the signal autonomously. (TDMCKFAIL is used to alert the attached TDM-bus client units of a TDM bus clock failure.)TDMCLK TDM timeslot clock (2048 kHz). One of the two TDM system clocks supplied by the active CAT. A negative transition indicates the beginning of a TDM timeslot.TDMFR TDM frame clock (8 kHz). One of the two TDM system clocks supplied by the active CAT. A positive-going pulse marks the beginning of the last timeslot in a TDM frame. (A TDM frame consists of 256 timeslots.)TDMSYNC1 TDM bus synchronization reference 1. An 8-kHz framing signal derived from the T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream, used to synchronize the TDM bus with the MSC. This signal is sourced from DS1 0 as directed by the active CPU. TDMSYNC1 routes to both CAT units, where the active CAT uses the signal as a synchronization reference to generate the TDM system clocks.TDMSYNC2 TDM bus synchronization reference 2. An 8-kHz framing signal derived from the T1_0/ E1_0 receive bit stream, used to synchronize the TDM bus with the MSC. This signal is sourced from DS1 1 under command of the active CPU. TDMSYNC2 routes to both CAT units, where the active CAT uses the signal as an alternate synchronization reference to generate the TDM system clocks. (TDMSYNC2 is an alternate signal to TDMSYNC1.)There is another set of the same signal lines described above associated with TDM1, NCI1, CAT 2, and CAT 3.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-37Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsMobile Switching Center (MSC) to Cell Site Communications For all Cell Releases prior to R5.1, the data and voice communications between the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) and the Cell Site are based on a DS1 (Digital Signal - Level 1) interface facility. It is a bipolar return-to-zero signal at a 1.544-Mb/s rate. A DS1 signal consists of 24 DS0 (Digital Signal - Level 0) channels. The Cell Site data communication links are capable of operating at 9.6-kb/s, 56-kb/s, or 64-kb/s rates. A DS1 carrier link can accommodate 24 digital voice communication channels or a combination of digital voice and data channels. For each DS1 link, the Radio Channel frames (RCFs) must have 1 DS1 interface circuit. One DS1 link and an interface circuit are needed for each of the 24 voice channels. Two data links are required between the P-RCF and the MSC for reliability. This is best accommodated by two DS1 links, with one data channel in each link. The two DS1 interface circuits needed in this arrangement are located on shelves 3 and 4 in the P-RCF. All Cell Site interfaces are digital, using DS1 boards with a Digital Cross-Connect (DSX-1) interface. When the facility is a T1 carrier, the DSX-1 interface allows connection directly to channel service units without the need for D4 channel banks. If analog facilities are used, D4 banks would, however, be required. The DSX-1 interface allows up to 660 feet between the DS1 board and the interconnecting facility. The DSX-1 interface also allows connection directly to microwave systems or to fiber-optic systems such as the DDM-1000. For the physical connections between the DS1 carrier facilities and each RCF, two cable/connector assemblies are used, one for transmit and one for receive. The cell R5.1 Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications (CEPT) feature provides a Cell Site that can operate in “international mode”. A Cell Site operated in the “domestic mode” communicates via the DS1 protocol over T1 facilities; a Cell Site operated in the “international mode” communicates via the CEPT protocol over E1 facilities. A Cell Site operating in the “international mode” can provide 30 channels for voice traffic. A Cell Site operated in the “domestic mode” can use either a DS1 communication circuit pack or a Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) circuit pack. A Cell Site operated in the “international mode” must use the DFI circuit pack. All data and voice communications between the MSC and Cell Sites operating in the “international mode” are based on a CEPT interface facility. This is a high density binary three signal at a 2.048-Mb/s rate. CEPT signal consists of 31 digital signal channels.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-38 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections DS1, DFI, and CAT Circuit DescriptionsThis section presents circuit descriptions for the DS1, DFI, and CAT plug-in circuit boards. The DS1 apparatus code is TN171, the DFI apparatus code is TN3500, and the CAT apparatus code is TN170.DS1 (TN171) Circuit DescriptionThe DS1 provides the interface between the RCF TDM bus, TDM0 or TDM1, and a T1 digital transmission line. The T1 line interface is the lowest level in the hierarchy of the North American Tcarrier digital transmission facility, which multiplexes twenty-four 64-kbit/s channels into a serial digital trunk (1544A kbit/s).The DS1 architecture is based on (1) the LC1046 DS1 line interface, (2) a DS1 chip set consisting of four large-scale integration circuits, and (3) the 327DA network processing element (NPE), all Lucent Technologies custom devices. The DS1 chip set provides the complete interface between a DS1 line interface device and 24 serial data channels that connect to the NPEs.NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up." DFI (TN3500) Circuit DescriptionThe DFI provides the interface between the RCF TDM bus, TDM0 or TDM1, and two T1 or E1 (CEPT-1)* digital transmission lines, although only one T1 or E1 line interface is currently supported. The E1 line interface is the lowest level in the hierarchy of the European E-carrier digital transmission facility, which multiplexes thirty-two 64-kbit/s channels into a serial digital trunk (2048 kbit/s).The DFI architecture is based on the following:■The T7290 T1/CEPT line interface■The T7230 primary access controller/framer (PAC) (See Figure 11-14)■The 327HB SCOTCH network processing element (SNPE).All of which are Lucent Technologies custom devices. Each of the two PACs, one for each carrier line, provides the complete interface between a T1/CEPT line interface device and a serial data bus known as the concentration highway that connects to the SNPEs.Both the PAC and T1/CEPT line interface devices can be configured for T1 or E1 operation.* CEPT stands for Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications Administrations. CEPT-1 and E1 are equivalent terms.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-39Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsThe T1/CEPT line interface device along with transformers, impedance-matching resistors, and manually set switches provide the digital transmission line interface (Refer to Table 11-3). The switches allow for T1 120-ohm operation or E1120-ohm or 75-ohm operation, as defined by the SW1 through SW5 switch settings in the table. The receive line-interface transmission format (on the line side) is alternate mark inversion (AMI), where a 1 is represented by either a positive or negative pulse, and a 0 is represented by a null pulse (no pulse). All pulse shapes are controlled by the T1/CEPT line interface device according to its equalizer control inputs, as defined by the SW6 and SW7 switch settings in the table. The receive digital output format (on the PAC side) is dual-rail nonreturn to zero (NRZ).To set switches SW1 through SW7, ensure that the DFI is out-of-service and then remove the DFI from its slot location. (There is no need to remove power from the slot location.) The switches are located at the middle (SW1-SW5) and the faceplate end (SW6, SW7) of the circuit board. Always wear a wrist grounding strap when handling circuit boards.NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."The PAC provides T1 or E1 framing, alarm reporting, performance monitoring, jitter attenuation, loopback, and independent receive and transmit framer paths. On the line interface side, the PAC receives dual-rail data and a receive line clock from the T1/CEPT line interface device, converts the data to a transistor-transistor logic (TTL) format, and then transmits the data onto the concentration highway using the TDM timeslot clock (2048 kHz). On the system side (TDM bus side), the PAC receives TTL data from the concentration highway at the TDM timeslot clock rate, converts the data to the dual-rail format, and then transmits the data and a transmit line clock (phase locked to the TDM timeslot clock) to the T1/CEPT line interface device. The PAC also derives an 8-kHz signal from the receive line clock to serve as a possible synchronization reference for the TDM clock source.Both the PAC and the SNPE have a dual, high-speed, serial interface for connection to two pairs of transmit and receive serial data buses known as concentration highway A and concentration highway B. Data may be transmitted or received on either one of these highways. In the DFI implementation, only concentration highway A is used for data exchange between a PAC and an SNPE. The highway operates as a 2048-kbit/s 32-timeslot serial bus where each timeslot is 8-bits wide.The SNPEs provide a programmable interface between the concentration highways and the parallel TDM bus. The SNPEs can provide a connection between any of the timeslots on the carrier line and any of the 251 timeslots on highway A or B of the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-40 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsNOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up." DFI (TN1713B) Circuit Operation Currently supplied DFI.Figure 11-14. Primary Access Controller/Framer(8-Bit Micro-Processor)Angel5Grn LED(Sync Src)Red LED(Failure)Addr / Data (8)* Primary Access Controller/ FramerD E F GA B CAddressLatchSRAMAddr (8)8EEPROM77 2EAYe l L E D(Line Alm)Visual Indicators8-kHz CLOCKExtracter &Elastic StorePAC 0*SignalingInserterTransmitLineEncoderReceiveLineDecoderLLBSecondaryBusControlBLBTo T1_0/ E1_02From T1_0/ E1_0FB(8)(8)2E8-kHz CLOCKExtracter &Elastic StorePAC 1*SignalingInserterTransmitLineEncoderReceiveLineDecoderLLBLineInterfaceDevice 1BLBTo T1_1/ E1_1From T1_1/ E1_18-KHz CLK_0TDM CLOCKSAddr Latch EnableResetConcHwy A_0G8-KHz CLK_1TDM ClocksConcHwy A_1437D2222P/O TDM Bus InterfaceSW2 SW5 SW1Addr (10)SW6SW7(Not Used)(Not Used)T1/ CEPTLineInterfaceDevice 0T1/ CEPTCSW3SW4A2
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-41Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections The SNPEs, under microprocessor control, can loop back any receive timeslot data from the TDM bus to any transmit timeslot on the TDM bus. Transmit data will continue to be sent to the carrier line but receive data will be discarded.The T1/CEPT line interface devices, the PACs, the SNPEs, and the SAKI are equipped with microprocessor interfaces that allow the on-board microprocessor to configure, monitor, and test the devices. The microprocessor, which serves as both the angel and main processor for the DFI, receives messages from the CPU via the TDM bus. The microprocessor interprets the messages and then addresses the appropriate device (or devices) to carry out the specified configuration or maintenance functions.Once the DFI has successfully completed its self test at powerup or after a reset, only three messages will be required to set up a full-duplex connection: an initialization message, a network-update “Talk ” message, and a network-update “Listen” message.Table 11-3. DFI Switch SettingsMODE SW7-3 SW7-2 SW7-1 SW6-3 SW6-2 SW6-1 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1T1*OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFFE1 120 Ohm ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFFE1 75 Ohm†ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF* The T1 line equalization, or line length compensation (determined by SW6 and SW7), is set for a transmission distance of 0 to 133 feet between the DFI and its associated channel service unit (CSU).†Since Lucent Technologies is using a balun device to accommodate E1 75-ohm operation, the DFI switch settings for E1 75-ohm operation are the same as for E1 120-ohm operation. (A balun is an impedance-matching device used to connect balanced twisted-pair cabling with unbalanced coaxial cable.)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-42 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections DFI Initialization Message for T1 OperationThe initialization message sets configuration parameters on the PAC and T1/CEPT line interface devices and may specify a synchronization reference for the TDM clocks. Configuration parameters for T1 operation include:D4 or ESF Framing To accommodate framing patterns, error detection, and signaling modes, individual T1/DS1 frames are grouped together to form superframe structures such as D4 and extended superframe (ESF). The D4 framing format uses a superframe structure consisting of 12 frames, and the ESF framing format uses a superframe structure consisting of 24 frames (See Figure 11-15, Sheets 1, 2, and 3).The T1 framing configuration (D4 or ESF) is specified via translations.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-43Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections Figure 11-15. Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format (Sheet 1 of 3)D4 Framing FormatFrame Number Bit Number F Bit* Bit Use in Each Channel Signaling Options†Fs FtTraffic YA‡ Signaling None 2-ST 4-ST10–1Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –2 193 0 –Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –3 386 –0Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –4 579 0 –Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –5 772 –1Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –6 965 1 –Bits 1–7 Bit 2 Bit 8§ – AA7 1158 –0Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –8 1351 1 –Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –9 1544 –1Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –10 1737 1 –Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –11 1930 –0Bits 1–8 Bit 2 None – – –12 2123 0 –Bits 1–7 Bit 2 Bit 8 –AB* F bit sequence is Fs sequence interleaved with Ft sequence.†Signaling option None: No robbed-bit signaling (bit 8 is used for traffic).Signaling option 2-ST: 2-state signaling (channel A only).Signaling option 4-ST: 4-state signaling (channels A and B).‡Remote yellow alarm – Bit 2 of each channel is set to a 0.§Robbed-bit signaling.** Remote Japanese yellow alarm – Fs bit in frame 12 is set to a 1.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-44 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-16. Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format (Sheet 2 of 3)Frame Number Bit Number F Bit* Bit Use in Each Channel Signaling Options†FeDLCRCTraffic Signaling‡None 2-ST 4-ST 16-ST10–D–Bits 1–8 None ––––2 193 –– C1 Bits 1–8 None ––––3 386 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––4 579 0 –– Bits 1–8 None ––––5 772 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––6 965 –– C2 Bits 1–7‡Bit 8‡–AAA7 1158 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––8 1351 0 –– Bits 1–8 None ––––9 1544 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––10 1737 –– C3 Bits 1–8 None ––––11 1930 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––12 2123 1 –– Bits 1–7‡Bit 8‡–ABB13 2316 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––14 2509 –– C4 Bits 1–8 None ––––15 2702 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––16 2895 0 –– Bits 1–8 None ––––17 3088 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––18 3281 –– C5 Bits 1–7‡Bit 8‡–AAC19 3474 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––20 3667 1 –– Bits 1–8 None ––––21 3860 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––22 4053 –– C6 Bits 1–8 None ––––23 4246 –D–Bits 1–8 None ––––24 4439 1 –– Bits 1–7‡Bit 8‡–ABD
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-45Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections Figure 11-17. Information Sheets for T1 D4 and ESF Framing Format (Sheet 3 of 3)CEPT-1, for Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications administrations, is the lowest level of hierarchy in the European E-carrier system. CEPT-1 and E1 are equivalent terms.Frame and Multiframe. The following illustration shows the basic CCITT CEPT frame and multiframe structures.The CCITT CEPT framing format consists of thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots, or channels, resulting in a 256-bit frame and a line rate of 2048 kbit/s (CEPT-1 rate). Framing information is carried in timeslot 0 (TS0), while local exchange carrier (LEC) signaling information, if used, is carried in timeslot 16 (TS16).Framing information is contained in the TS0 frame alignment signal (FAS) word and the TS0 not-word. The TS0 FAS word is defined as the TS0 byte containing a 0011011 pattern in bit positions 2 through 8. The TS0 not-word is defined as the TS0 byte that does not contain the FAS pattern. TS0 FAS-word frames interleave with TS0 not-word frames, as shown in the facing table.The CCITT CEPT line may contain both a TS0 and a TS16 multiframe. Both multiframes consist of 16 frames.TS0 Multiframe. The TS0 multiframe, also known as the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) multiframe, is used in systems that use the CRC-4 error checking, which is an enhanced error-monitoring capability providing for additional protection against emulation of the FAS-word pattern. The multiframe is divided into two submultiframes, each consisting of eight frames. The multiframe is found by looking for the 001011 pattern in bit position 1 of TS0. This pattern is interleaved with the CRC-4 bits.Note that association of frame numbers to TS0s is only applicable to the CEPT format with CRC-4. In CEPT without CRC-4, only two types of names can be identified: frames containing the TS0 FAS word, and frames not containing the TS0 FAS word (the TS0 not-word).12345678Timeslot 0 Timeslot 1 Timeslot 31FR 0 FR 1 FR 2 FR 15256-Bit Frame – 125 µs8-Bit Timeslot, or Channel – 3.91 µs16-Multiframe – 2 ms
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-46 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsZCS or B8ZS Line FormatT1 standards require an average of at least one 1 in every eight bits of transmitted data. The T1 framing format uses zero code suppression (ZCS) or binary 8 zero substitution (B8ZS) to meet this requirement. The ZCS scheme inserts a 1 after every seventh-consecutive 0 to keep the density of 1s high enough to preserve accurate timing at the remote endpoint. The remote endpoint removes the inserted 1.The B8ZS scheme is used for those applications requiring clear-channel transmission*. When eight consecutive 0s occur in a bit stream, the B8ZS scheme replaces the eight 0s with a specific pattern to keep the density of 1s high enough to preserve accurate timing at the remote endpoint. The remote endpoint recognizes the pattern and replaces it with the original string of eight 0s.The T1 line format configuration (ZCS or B8ZS) is specified via translations.Line-length Compensation SettingThere are five line-length compensation settings for T1 operation: 0 to 133 feet, 134 to 266 feet, 267 to 399 feet, 400 to 533 feet, and 534 to 655 feet. A line-length compensation setting offsets the cable loss in the path between the DFI and its associated channel service unit (CSU).The line-length compensation setting is specified via translations.Before a DFI is initialized, that is, during powerup or after a reset (at which time the DFI is transmitting an all 1s signal, or blue alarm, onto the T1 line), the DFI transmits in accordance to the line-length compensation setting of on-board switches SW6 and SW7. Once the DFI is initialized, it transmits in accordance to the line-length compensation setting specified in translations.Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB ControlLine loopback (LLB), board loopback (BLB), or both can be enabled so that the loopback can be invoked on demand through the microprocessor interface. The LLB loops the received signal from the line back to the transmit side without removing bipolar violations; a blue alarm (all 1s) is sent to the system (toward TDM bus). When BLB is enabled, the system data is fully processed by PAC and is then looped back to the system, but is not transmitted to the line; a blue alarm is sent to the line.* Clear-channel transmission means that the full capacity of the T1 line is available to the user, that is, no portion of the channel is reserved for carrier framing or control bits.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-47Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsEnabling or disabling of on-demand LLB/BLB control is not translatable. Cell Site system software disables this configuration option for both PAC devices.Select Synchronization ReferenceThe 8-kHz signal derived from the received T1 data can be supplied back to the TDM clock source on the CAT.Selecting a synchronization reference is not translatable. Cell Site system software determines whether the DFI is selected as a synchronization reference.Specify Idle CodeAll inactive T1 transmit timeslots will contain an idle code, which is a programmable 8-bit pattern.Selecting an idle code is not translatable. Cell Site system software sets the idle code to 11111110.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-48 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsDFI Initialization Message for E1 OperationThe initialization message sets configuration parameters on the PAC and T1/CEPT line interface devices and may specify a synchronization reference for the TDM clocks. Configuration parameters for E1 operation include:CEPT Framing with or without CRC-4 Error CheckingTo accommodate framing patterns, error detection, and signaling modes, 16 individual CEPT frames are grouped together to form a multiframe structure. Two different multiframe formats are defined: one associated with timeslot 0 (TS0) and the other associated with timeslot 16 (TS16). The TS0 multiframe structure provides an error checking capacity using a CRC-4 algorithm as defined by CCITT Recommendation G.704 (See Figure 11-18).The CEPT framing configuration (with or without CRC-4 error checking) is specified via translations.CCS or CAS Signaling Mode Common-channel signaling (CCS) and channel-associated signaling (CAS) are signaling modes associated with the TS16 multiframe structure. In the CCS mode, TS16 is available to carry user (digital-voice) data. In the CAS mode, TS16 is reserved for local exchange carrier (LEC) signaling and therefore is not available to carry user data. The CEPT signaling mode (CCS or CAS) is specified via translations.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-49Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections Figure 11-18. Information Sheets for CCITT CEPT Frame FormatWith and Without CRC-4FrameNumberBit Use in TS0 Bit Use in TS1612345678123456780C1/Si 00110110000X0YmX1X21 0 /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A1 B1 C1 D1 A17 B17 C17 D172C2/Si 0011011A2B2C2D2A18B18C18D183 0 /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A3 B3 C3 D3 A19 B19 C19 D194C3/Si 0011011A4B4C4D4A20B20C20D205 1 /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A5 B5 C5 D5 A21 B21 C21 D216C4/Si 00 1 10 1 1 A6B6C6D6A22B22C22D227 0 /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A7 B7 C7 D7 A23 B23 C23 D238C1/Si 0011011A8B8C8D8A24B24C24D249 1 /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A9 B9 C9 D9 A25 B25 C25 D2510 C2/Si 0011011A10B10C10D10A26B26C26D2611 1 /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A11 B11 C11 D11 A27 B27 C27 D2712 C3/Si 0011011A12B12C12D12A28B28C28D2813 E /Si 1 Yf Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 A13 B13 C13 D13 A29 B29 C29 D29Ai—Di —Per-channel signaling bitsC1—C4 —CRC-4 bitsE—Remote end block error bitsSi —International spare bitsSa4—Sa8 —Additional spare bits for national useX0—X2 —X spare bitsYf —Remote frame alarm (RFA) bit (active high)Ym —Remote multiframe alarm (RMA) bit (active high)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-50 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsHDB3 or Transparent Line FormatCEPT standards require an average of at least one 1 in every eight bits of transmitted data. The CEPT framing format uses high-density binary 3 (HDB3) zero code suppression to meet this requirement. When four consecutive 0s occur in a bit stream, the HDB3 scheme replaces the four 0s with a specific pattern to keep the density of 1s high enough to preserve accurate timing at the remote endpoint. The remote endpoint recognizes the pattern and replaces it with the original string of four 0s. In contrast, the transparent line format allows the transmit bit stream to pass through without being modified.The CEPT line format configuration (HDB3 or transparent) is specified via translations.Enable or Disable On-demand LLB or BLB ControlLine loopback (LLB), board loopback (BLB), or both can be enabled so that the loopback can be invoked on demand through the microprocessor interface. The LLB loops the received signal from the line back to the transmit side without removing bipolar violations; an alarm indication signal (AIS, all 1s) is sent to the system (toward TDM bus). When BLB is enabled, the system data is fully processed by PAC and is then looped back to the system, but is not transmitted to the line; an AIS is sent to the line.Enabling or disabling of on-demand LLB/BLB control is not translatable. Cell Site system software disables this configuration option for both PAC devices.Select Synchronization ReferenceThe 8-kHz signal derived from the received CEPT data can be supplied back to the TDM clock source on the CAT.Selecting a synchronization reference is not translatable. Cell Site system software determines whether the DFI is selected as a synchronization reference.Select Idle Code All inactive CEPT transmit timeslots will contain an idle code, which is a programmable 8-bit pattern.Selecting an idle code is not translatable. Cell Site system software sets the idle code to 11111110.DFI Network-Update Talk MessageA network-update “Tal k” message is required to select a digital facilities receive timeslot and assign it to a TDM transmit timeslot. (This message is used to program the SNPEs.) It defines the timeslot of the carrier line that the DFI will receive data from and the timeslot of the TDM bus to which it will be transmitted.NOTE:TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."DFI Network-Update Listen MessageA network-update “Listen” message is required to select a TDM receive timeslot and assign it to a digital facilities transmit timeslot. (This message is used to program the SNPEs.) It defines the timeslot of the TDM bus that the DFI will receive data from and the timeslot of the carrier line to which it will be transmitted.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-51Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsDFI Status IndicatorsThe DFI faceplate has three light-emitting diode (LED) indicators, one red, one yellow, and one green. Their meanings are as follows:Red LED Controlled by the DFI; lighted during the self-test initiated upon powerup or after a reset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test; lighted during normal operation if the DFI is insane.Yellow LED Controlled by Cell Site system software; lighted if the DFI detects any alarm other than a minor, misframe, or slip alarm for T1 operation (or a 10e-6 error-ratio or slip alarm for E1 operation) on the line connected to the DFI.Green LED Controlled by Cell Site system software; the DFI selected as a synchronization reference has this LED lighted; only one DFI (or DS1) can have the green LED lighted for the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1); if the local oscillator on the CAT is the synchronization reference for the TDM bus, no DFI (or DS1) will have its green LED lighted for that bus.During normal operation and assuming the DFI is not the synchronization reference, all three of its LEDs should be off. Also, as a troubleshooting aid, if the red and yellow LEDs are lighted, suspect that the line switches on the DFI are set to the wrong settings.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-52 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsCAT (TN170) Circuit DescriptionThe CAT performs three independent functions:1. Bus clock generation and monitoring for the TDM bus2. Maintenance tone generation3. Maintenance tone detection and measurement.These functions are implemented by the TDM bus clock generator circuit, the tone generator circuit, and the tone detector circuit .
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-53Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-19. CAT Block Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)(8-BIT MICRO-PROCESSOR)ANGELBUSTRANSCEIVERSSAKI(BUS SANITYAND CONTROLINTERFACE)EPROM(BOOT) SRAMADDR LATCH ENABLEEA262PORT 2 DATAADDR/ DATA (8)ADDR (8)ANANPE(NETWORKPROCESSINGELEMENT)22GRD(ANGELMODE)RESETTX/RXCONTROL(HARDWIREDSLOT ADDR)7TDM BUS INTERFACEABGRN LED(ACT CLK)RED LED(FAILURE)AL M TO/ FROM SHEET 2A B CBA4DATA (8)8DATA (8)6 3BCDEFGIJKLM(NOTE)TDMSYNC2TDMSYNC1TDMFRTDMCLKH512-kHz CLK2TDM0/1 BUSTDM CLOCK AND CONTROL BUSNOTE:ADDRESSLATCH
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-54 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFigure 11-20. CAT Block Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)L M TO/ FROM SHEET 1A B C8IJKLMSYNC SOURCEREF SELECTABCDEFTDMSYNC2TDMSYNC1TDMFRTDMCLK2048 kHz8 kHzLOCAL OSC(2048 kHz)* 8-BIT COUNTER (COUNTS FROM 0 TO 255)BUSINTERFACECONTROL TIMESLOTTA B LE(DUAL-PORTRAM)ADAD8-BITCOUNTER*TG DSPTONETABLE(DUAL-PORTRAM)ADADSERIAL IN/PA R AL L ELOUTGTIMESLOTCOUNTER*H PORT 2 DATATD DSP I/OINTERFACEBUS A/B SELECTCLOCKGENERATOR(PHASE LOCKLOOP)8-kHz REF8-MHzOSC512-kHz CLKADDR (8) ADDR/ DATA (8)TDM BUS CLOCK GENERATOR CIRCUITTONE GENERATOR CIRCUITCOUNTGENERATOR888 8888÷ BY2568-kHz LOCTONE DETECTOR CIRCUIT52ENBENB2
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-55Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsBus Clock Generation and Monitoring for the TDM BusThe TDM bus clock generator circuit provides an 8-kHz frame clock and a 2048-kHz timeslot clock for the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1). Possible synchronization references are the 8-kHz frame clock (TDMFR ), 2 8-kHz signals derived from the carrier lines via the DS1 or DFI (TDMSYNC1 and TDMSYNC2 ), and the 8-kHz signal derived from the on-board local reference oscillator (8-kHz LOC ).The TDM bus clock generator circuit monitors both the 8-kHz reference signal and the 8-kHz output clock of the phase lock loop (PLL) to determine when a slip occurs and to record the number of slips. A slip is declared when the 8-kHz output clock of the PLL moves one clock cycle ahead or one clock cycle behind the 8-kHz reference signal. (Presumably, this happens when the 8-kHz reference signal has a large degree of jitter, or is out of the frequency range of the PLL.) The CAT declares a loss of signal when a specified number of slips occur in any 5-ms period; the default value upon powerup or after a reset is 10.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-56 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsMaintenance Tone GenerationThe tone generator circuit provides test tones for system diagnostics and maintenance. These tones are transmitted on the TDM bus for detection and measurement by the tone detector circuit. There are two tone-generator sources: the tone generator digital signal processor (TG DSP) and the count generator.The TG DSP generates the following tones:404Hz at-16 dBm1004Hz at-16 dBm1004Hz at 0 dBm2804Hz at-16 dBm1000Hz at 0 dBm (digital miliwatt).*The TG DSP generates new values for each tone every TDM bus frame (125 microseconds) and stores them in the tone table. The tone table is a dual-port RAM that is written by the TG DSP and read by the timeslot table (also a dual-port RAM). The tone table is logically split into two RAMs; the TG DSP writes into one half, while the timeslot table supplies an address to read the other half. Every TDM bus frame, special hardware alternates the TG-DSP and timeslot-table access to each half of memory, to guarantee that stable data is written to the TDM bus.Both the angel microprocessor and the timeslot counter access the timeslot table. The address of each of the 256 memory locations in the timeslot table is associated with a timeslot on the TDM bus. To enable a tone x on timeslot y, the angel microprocessor writes an 8-bit code for tone x into address y of the timeslot table. The 8-bit code consists of six address bits for the tone table, one of which also enables the tone table (and disables the count generator), and two bus-select bits that determine whether the tone table connects to highway A or highway B, or both. The timeslot counter, which is incremented by the TDM timeslot clock (2048 kHz), supplies the addresses (0 through 255) to read the timeslot table.To enable the count generator on timeslot y, the angel microprocessor writes an 8-bit code into address y of the timeslot table. The 8-bit code consists of five unused bits, one bit that enables the count generator (and disables the tone table), and two bus-select bits that determine whether the count generator connects to highway A or highway B, or both. The count generator, which is clocked by the TDM frame clock (8 kHz), continually cycles through a count of 0 through 255.* The digital miliwatt, or dmW, is a 1-kHz sine-wave tone at a power level of 1 miliwatt (0 dBm). It is the standard reference level generated by eight 8-bit words as defined by the CCITT.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-57Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsMaintenance Tone Detection and MeasurementThe tone detector circuit consists of a tone detector digital signal processor (TD DSP), an angel input/output interface, and an 8-MHz oscillator. Port 2 of the network processing element (NPE) supplies the tone/count data from the TDM bus to the TD DSP. The angel commands the TD DSP to detect and measure a specific tone/count, and the DSP returns the measurement value to the angel.The angel programs the NPE in accordance to two messages received from the CPU: a network-update “Listen” message and a network-update “Talk” message. A network-update “Listen” message defines the timeslot of the TDM bus from which the tone detector circuit will receive data. A network-update “Talk ” message defines the timeslot of the TDM bus onto which the output of the tone generator circuit will be transmitted. The NPE controls when data is transmitted to and received from the TDM bus via the Tx/Rx control circuit.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-58 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsCAT Status IndicatorsThe CAT faceplate has two LED indicators, one red and one green. Their meanings are as follows:Red LED This indicator is controlled by the CAT. The indicator is lighted during the self-test initiated upon powerup or after a reset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test; lighted during normal operation if the CAT is insane.Green LED This indicator is controlled by Cell Site system software. The CAT selected as the TDM clock source has this LED lighted. The CPU sends a message to the NCI (NCI0 for TDM0 and NCI1 for TDM1) specifying which of the two CATs is to supply the TDM system clocks for the bus. The NCI, in turn, uses the TDMCKSEL control line to activate the specified CAT.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-59Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsAutomatic Recovery ActionsAll Cell Site faults fall into one of two categories, depending on the way they are handled: ■Those faults dealt with initially by the Cell Site, where there may or may not be follow-up action by the technician■Those faults dealt with only by the technician.The first category of faults involves Cell Site equipment having associated software diagnostic tests. The second category of faults pertains to scanned alarms, which are faults gathered from Cell Site equipment having no associated software diagnostic tests. This section deals with a subset of the first category of faults. Specifically, this section describes automatic recovery actions for the RCC, DS1/ DFI, and CAT. The RCC contains software that takes automatic recovery actions (corrective actions) upon fault recognition. Recovery includes fault isolation and reconfiguration.The recovery actions are dependent on the fault type. The RCC may take the suspect unit out-of-service and perform a diagnostic test on it. If the unit fails the diagnostic test, it is left in the out-of-service state. If the faulty unit belongs to the RCC controller, the entire controller is taken out-of-service, and its redundant mate is made the active controller.The RCC reports the Cell Site faults to the ECP, including the results of RCC-initiated diagnostic tests. The RCC also reports any change in equipment (hardware) status as a result of the recovery action.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-60 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsHardware Error Handling StrategyThe automatic recovery actions in the RCC are done through the hardware error handler (HEH) software subsystem. HEH receives errors from hardware units, functional tests, and call-processing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore or remove) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.Depending upon the severity of the error, either HEH takes immediate recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined number of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH prints only an error report.A throttling mechanism at the cell limits the number of alarms reported on a per board basis to the ECP. Within each 15-minute period, HEH reports no more than one alarm for any particular board.HEH performs the following types of error analysis:Immediate Action For severe errors that are service-affecting, such as loss of communication between the MSC and the cell, HEH takes immediate action. For most on-board hardware errors, HEH will request a conditional restore of the suspect unit.The conditional restore maintenance action schedules an event or process to restore the suspect unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test. If the unit fails the diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. The failed unit remains in the out-of-service state.All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis For an HEH-initiated conditional restore request, if the unit passes all diagnostic tests, the unit is restored to service, and HEH adds a count to an ATP counter for the unit. If that count exceeds an assigned threshold within a predefined time period (typically three in 40 minutes or five in 24 hours), HEH will request a conditional remove of the unit. (Possibly, the diagnostic tests for the unit are not robust enough to detect the problem, or the problem is external to the unit.) This type of error analysis prevents a recovery cycle that might otherwise continue indefinitely.Single Time-period Analysis Refers to the use of error counters assigned to each hardware unit (DS1, DFI, CAT, and so on). If an error count for a unit remains below a predefined threshold for a specific period of time, HEH clears the counter. This type of error analysis is based on the theory that if a unit has remained reliable for an extended period of time, its error history should be forgotten completely. A timer value of 40 minutes is used.Fail/Pass Analysis HEH performs this type of error analysis on call-processing detected errors such as voice channel confirmation failures. When the number of failures exceeds
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-61Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnectionssome predefined value relative to the number of successful attempts (such as 2400 failures in 4000 attempts), HEH takes recovery action.Leaky Bucket Analysis Refers to the decrementing of non-zero error counters for the configurable hardware units. The decrementing is done at set time intervals. This technique is more flexible than a simple analysis based on the number of errors in a single fixed period of time.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-62 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsRCC Hardware Errors and Recovery ActionsA fault within any of the units of the active RCC controller causes HEH to shut down the controller and to activate the mate RCC controller, assuming the mate RCC controller is in the standby state. If the mate RCC controller is out-of-service, HEH takes no action other than to unconditionally remove the active RCC; at that point, both RCCs would be out-of-service.Assuming the mate RCC is in standby, HEH conditionally restores the active RCC to standby. This action spawns the following actions:■A switch request that moves the active RCC to standby and the mate RCC to the active state.■A remove request that moves the standby RCC to the out-of-service state.■A diagnose request that diagnoses the out-of-service RCC; if successful, results in the RCC being restored to the standby state; if not successful, results in the RCC remaining in the out-of-service state.NOTE:The assumption here is that the active RCC is faulty. If, in fact, the standby RCC is faulty, HEH will conditionally restore the standby RCC to standby—no switching of RCC sides will occur.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-63Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsDS1/DFI Hardware Errors and Recovery ActionsThe DS1 or DFI provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between the carrier lines and the TDM buses internal to the RCF frames. It also provides the external clock source by which all data and signaling transfers are synchronized over the TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1).The automatic fault-recovery procedure for a DS1/DFI depends upon the fault type for T1 operation and for E1 operation.Throughout this section, the term “DS1” will be used to collectively represent both the DS1 and DFI units. Only when there is a need to distinguish between the DS1 and the DFI units will the term “DFI” be used.HEH sends a slip count inquiry message to the DS1 every half hour, to which the DS1 responds with the number of slip conditions it has recorded during the last half hour. If the number of slip conditions is 44 or greater for a DS1 supplying synchronization for the TDM bus, HEH will change the synchronization reference to another DS1 or to local (for local oscillator) if no DS1 synchronization reference is available. This action may occur any time up to one half hour after HEH receives a DS1 slip count of 44 or greater. If the DS1 slip count exceeds 88, HEH will take action immediately.In addition, HEH sends a misframe count inquiry message* to the DS1 every half hour, to which the DS1 responds with the number of misframe conditions it has recorded during the last half hour. If the number of misframe conditions is nine or greater for a DS1 supplying synchronization for the TDM bus, HEH will change the synchronization reference to another DS1 or to local if no DS1 synchronization reference is available. This action may occur any time up to one half hour after HEH receives a DS1 misframe count of nine or greater. If the DS1 misframe count exceeds 17, HEH will take action immediately.When a TDM bus is synchronized to local, HEH will attempt to switch to the primary or secondary reference DS1 every five minutes. The switch will only proceed if the primary or secondary reference DS1 is now free of alarms and in the active state.* T1 operation only. HEH does not send a misframe count inquiry message to a DFI configured for E1 operation.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-64 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections DS1/DFI and T1 Errors—Detailed DescriptionThis section describes alarms, error reporting, and performance monitoring functions performed by the DS1. In addition, this section discusses the subsequent actions that are taken by the DS1 as a result of various alarm conditions. For important background information concerning T1/DS1 frame structure as well as two types of superframe structures known as D4 and extended superframe (ESP).The DS1 reports autonomously certain error conditions and statistics when a change of state occurs or a threshold is exceeded. The DS1 effectively filters the alarms to avoid reporting spurious conditions; that is, an alarm has to occur a certain amount times within a given time frame before the DS1 will report the alarm. The DS1 will report only the most serious of any alarms that may be present at any particular time. The DS1 will also report autonomously when an alarm ceases (deactivates).Loss Of Signal (LOS) The DS1 cannot detect the received signal on the T1 line. The DS1 inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the T1 line. (That is, the DS1 blocks the signal of the T1 port to, but not from, the timeslots on the TDM bus carrying digital-voice or signaling for the T1 port.) It also begins transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port.The DS1 declares an LOS when it cannot detect a data signal for approximately one second, and deactivates LOS when the data signal is present for approximately 16 seconds.Blue Alarm The DS1 is receiving an all-1s pattern on the T1 line. The DS1 inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the T1 line. It also begins transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port.The DS1 declares a blue alarm when it detects an all-1s pattern for approximately two seconds, and deactivates the blue alarm when the condition is clear for approximately 16 seconds.The DS1, itself, will transmit a blue alarm to the remote endpoint during board initialization, that is, during the on-board self-test initiated upon powerup or after a system reset.Red Alarm The DS1 cannot detect the framing pattern in the received signal on the T1 line. The DS1 inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the T1 line. It also begins transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-65Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsThe DS1 declares a red alarm when it detects framing errors for approximately three seconds, and deactivates the red alarm when the condition is clear for approximately 16 seconds.In D4 or ESF, a framing error occurs when any two of four, or two of six, consecutive frame synchronization bits (Fs or Ft in D4, Fe in ESF) are in error.Major Alarm The received signal on the T1 line has a bit error ratio exceeding 10e-3 over a predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate exceeds 1 in 1000 bits.) The DS1 begins transmitting a yellow alarm signal to the remote endpoint of the port, but transmission and reception over the T1 line proceed with no interruption at this end of the connection.The bit error ratio is measured with framing bit errors in D4 and with CRC errors in ESF. In D4, the DS1 declares a major alarm when the error ratio exceeds 10e-3 for 16 seconds, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for 16 seconds. In ESF, the DS1 declares a major alarm when the error ratio exceeds 10e-3 for 6 seconds, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for 6 seconds.Yellow Alarm The DS1 is receiving a yellow alarm signal from the remote endpoint (that is, the other endpoint has an LOS, blue alarm, red alarm, or major alarm condition, although there are no problems at this endpoint). The DS1 takes no action other than reporting this alarm.The DS1 reports a yellow alarm condition when the condition persists for approximately 0.4 seconds, and negates the report when the yellow alarm condition has ceased for approximately 0.4 seconds.In D4, a yellow alarm is indicated by a 0 in bit 2 of all incoming channels. In ESF, a yellow alarm is indicated by an alternating pattern of eight 1s and eight 0s on the 4-kbit/s data link (DL).The DS1 cannot determine when receiving a yellow alarm whether the channels are usable—they would be if there were a major alarm at the other end—or not usable—they would not be if one of the other conditions were in effect.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-66 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsFan AlarmsPreamp Fan All preamp fans in the Linear Amplifier Frame (LAF) are powered from two of the four 20A DC feeders which supply power to the LAC 0 position in the frame. Preamp fans will not have power if the breakers to LAC 0 are open. To avoid overheating the preamps, do not power down LAC 0 for more than a few minutes if other Linear Amplifier Modules (LACs) are powered. If LAC 0 needs to be powered down for an extended period of time, disconnect the J1 power cable from LAC 0 (LAC 4 in LAF1), and close the two 20A breakers which supply connector J1. Symptoms: C-Series LACs: Major AlarmLAC LEDS = FANS and PREAMP A/B-Series LACs: Minor Alarm LAC LEDS = LINEARIZER Procedure: Check that all 20A breakers feeding LAC 0 (LAC 4 in LAF1) are closed. If a fan is stopped, check its wiring. Check the fan for blockage. Check the 24-volt DC voltage on connector J1 supplying LAC 0. If normal, the fan should be replaced. Replace both preamp fans at the same time, even if the other fan is working normally. LineariZeR Fan Procedure Symptoms: C-Series LACs: Major Alarm LAC LEDS = FANS and LINEARIZER A/B-Series LACs:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-67Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsMinor Alarm LAC LEDS = LINEARIZER Procedure: Check the LINEARIZER FAN fuse on the front panel of the LineariZeR (LZR). Replace with a new fuse, if blown. If the fuse is good, remove the front grille from the LZR and carefully check to see if the fan is turning. The fan is located on the far right side of the LZR cabinet. Check the fan wiring for shorts or opens. If none are found, replace the fan. LAU Fan Procedure Symptoms: C-Series LACs: Major Alarm LAC LEDS = FANS and LAU A/B-Series LACs: Minor Alarm LAC LEDS = LAU Procedure: Check the LINEAR AMPLIFIER UNIT FAN fuse on the front panel of the LineariZeR (LZR) (Figure 4-17). Replace it with a new fuse, if blown. If the fuse is good, check to see if the fan is turning. Check for blockage. Remove a few Linear Amplifier Modules (LAMs) at the top of the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) and check the DC voltage at the inductor terminals. If the voltage is greater than 22V, replace the fan. If the voltage is less than 22V, check the DC power cabling. Measuring the Linear Amplifier Unit (LAU) Fan Voltage
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-68 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsDS1 ErrorsMinor Alarm The received signal on the T1 line has a bit error ratio between 10e-3 and 10e-6 over a predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate is less than 1 in 1000 bits but exceeds 1 in 1,000,000 bits.) The DS1 takes no action other than reporting this alarm.The bit error ratio is measured with framing bit errors in D4 and with CRC errors in ESF. In D4, the DS1 declares a minor alarm when the error ratio exceeds 10e-6 for 41 minutes, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for 41 minutes. In ESF, the DS1 declares a minor alarm when the error ratio exceeds 10e-6 for 10 minutes, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for 10 minutes.Misframe Count The number of framing bit errors detected by the DS1 since the last system inquiry. The DS1 will report the number of misframes autonomously whenever the number of misframes reaches 17. The misframe count will be reset (misframe count = 0) when the DS1 receives a Misframe Count Inquiry message from the CPU.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-69Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsDFI and E1 Errors - Detailed DescriptionThis section describes alarms, error reporting, and performance monitoring functions performed by the DFI configured for E1 operation. In addition, this section discusses the subsequent actions that are taken by the DFI as a result of various alarm conditions.The DFI reports the following autonomous alarms to HEH:* Loss Of Signal (LOS) The DFI cannot detect the received signal on the E1 line. The DFI inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the E1 line. (That is, the DFI blocks the signal of the E1 port to, but not from, the timeslots on the TDM bus carrying digital-voice or signaling for the E1 port.) It also begins transmitting a remote frame alarm (RFA) signal to the remote endpoint of the port.The DFI declares an LOS when it cannot detect a data signal for approximately 2.4 seconds, and deactivates LOS when the data signal is present for approximately 12 seconds.Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) The DFI is receiving an all-1s pattern on the E1 line. The DFI inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the E1 line. It also begins transmitting an RFA signal to the remote endpoint of the port.The DFI declares an AIS when it detects an all-1s pattern for approximately 0.6 seconds, and deactivates AIS when the condition is clear for approximately 0.2 seconds. The DFI, itself, will transmit an AIS signal to the remote endpoint during board initialization, that is, during the on-board self-test initiated upon powerup or after a reset.Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA) The DFI cannot detect the framing pattern in the received signal on the E1 line. The DFI inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the E1 line. It also begins transmitting an RFA signal to the remote endpoint of the port.The DFI declares an LFA when it detects framing errors for approximately 2.4 seconds, and deactivates LFA when the condition is clear for approximately 12 seconds.A framing error is defined as an incorrect bit in one of the seven framing bits in the timeslot 0 (TS0) frame alignment signal (FAS) word or an error in bit 2 of the TS0 * For any DFI autonomous alarm except the 10e-6 error-ratio alarm and slip count, Cell Site system software will turn on the DFI’s yellow LED.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-70 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnectionsnot-word. The DFI begins a sequential search for new framing candidates, starting one bit position beyond the position where the LFA was detected and continuing until a valid candidate is found.Loss of Multiframe Alignment (LMA) The DFI cannot detect the multiframe alignment pattern (for the multiframe selected) in the received signal on an E1 line. The DFI inhibits the updating of the received signaling information from the E1 line. For a timeslot 16 (TS16) LMA, it also begins transmitting a remote multiframe alarm (RMA) signal to the remote endpoint of the port. The DFI declares a TS0 LMA when an error has occurred in the 6-bit multiframe pattern (001011 interleaved with the CRC-4 bits) for approximately 2.4 seconds, and deactivates TS0 LMA when TS0 multiframe alignment has recovered for approximately 12 seconds. The DFI declares a TS16 LMA when an error has occurred in the 4-bit multiframe alignment signal (MAS) pattern for approximately 2.4 seconds, and deactivates TS16 LFA when TS16 multiframe alignment has recovered for approximately 12 seconds.10e-3 Error-ratio Alarm The received signal on the E1 line has a bit error ratio exceeding 10e-3 over a predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate exceeds 1 in 1000 bits.) The DFI begins transmitting an RFA signal to the remote endpoint of the port, but transmission and reception over the E1 line proceed with no interruption at this end of the connection.The DFI declares a 10e-3 error-ratio alarm when the frame-alignment error ratio exceeds 10e-3 for two consecutive four-second periods, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for three consecutive four-second periods.A frame alignment error, or framing error, is defined as an incorrect bit in one of the seven framing bits in the TS0 FAS word or an error in bit 2 of the TS0 not-word.Remote Frame Alarm (RFA) The DFI is receiving an RFA signal from the remote endpoint (that is, the other endpoint has an LOS, AIS, LFA, or 10e-3 error-ratio alarm condition, although there are no problems at this endpoint). The DFI takes no action other than reporting this alarm.The DFI reports the RFA condition when the condition persists for approximately 0.6 seconds, and negates the report when the RFA alarm condition has ceased for approximately 0.2 seconds.The DFI cannot determine when receiving an RFA alarm whether the channels are usable—they would be if there were a 10e-3 error-ratio alarm at the other
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-71Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnectionsend—or not usable—they would not be if one of the other conditions were in effect.Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA)The DFI is receiving an RMA signal on an E1 line (that is, the other endpoint has a TS16 LMA condition, although there are no problems at this endpoint). The DFI takes no action other than reporting this alarm.The DFI reports the RMA alarm condition when the condition persists for approximately 0.6 seconds, and negates the report when the RMA alarm condition has ceased for approximately 0.2 seconds. 10e-6 Error-Ratio Alarm The received signal on the E1 line has a bit error ratio between 10e-3 and 10e-6 over a predefined period of time. (The average bit error rate is less than 1 in 1000 bits but exceeds 1 in 1,000,000 bits.) The DFI takes no action other than reporting this alarm.The DFI declares a 10e-6 error-ratio alarm when the frame-alignment error ratio exceeds 10e-6 for 30 minutes, and deactivates the alarm when the clear threshold has been reached for 45 minutes.Slip Count The number of times the DS1 has either dropped a frame from the received data or repeated a frame since the last system inquiry. The DS1 will report the number of slips autonomously whenever the number of slips reaches 88. The slip count will be reset (slip count = 0) when the DS1 receives a Slip Count Inquiry message from the CPU.The T1 port on the DS1 receives data from a T1 line into a two-frame buffer (by necessity, at the T1 line rate—8000 frames per second), and empties this buffer onto the TDM bus (by necessity, at the TDM bus rate). If these rates are not identical over a significant period of time, then the receive buffer will either overflow or underflow, resulting in the deletion of a frame or the repeat of a frame. Each overflow or underflow of the buffer is counted as a single slip.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-72 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsCAT Hardware Errors and Recovery ActionsThe CAT, which is phase-locked to one of the carrier lines attached to the primary RCF or growth RCF frame, provides system clocks for the TDM bus (either TDM0 or TDM1).The automatic fault-recovery procedure for a CAT depends upon the fault type (See Table 11-4).The CAT monitors both the 8-kHz reference signal and the 8-kHz output clock of its on-board phase lock loop (PLL) to determine when a slip occurs and to record the number of slips. A slip is declared when the 8-kHz output clock of the PLL moves one clock cycle ahead or one clock cycle behind the 8-kHz reference signal. (Presumably, this happens when the 8-kHz reference signal has a large degree of jitter, or is out of the frequency range of the PLL.) The CAT declares a loss of signal error when a specified number of slips occur in any 5-ms period. The default value upon powerup or after a reset is 10.The CAT will report a loss of signal error to HEH as soon as it occurs.HEH sends a slip count inquiry message to the CAT every half hour, to which the CAT responds with the number of slip conditions it has recorded during the last half hour. If the number of slip conditions is greater than 44, HEH will send a PPM inquiry message to the CAT to determine the total parts per million (PPM) counts detected by the CAT when using the primary or secondary DS1/DFI synchronization reference. Whether the PPM count is high or low, HEH takes no recovery action other than to report the PPM count to the ECP.A high PPM count means that the quality of the reference source (carrier line) is poor. A further deterioration in the quality of the reference source will cause the CAT to declare a loss of signal error, at which time HEH will take corrective action.When a TDM bus is synchronized to local, HEH will attempt to switch to the primary or secondary reference DS1/DFI every five minutes. The switch will only proceed if the primary or secondary reference DS1/DFI is now free of alarms and in the active state.Call-Processing Errors and Recovery ActionsIn addition to the hardware faults already described, HEH can detect certain AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA call-processing related errors.Diversity Imbalance Errors and Recovery ActionsDiversity imbalance errors are reported autonomously by a Cell Site radio (AMPS, TDMA, or CDMA) when it perceives widely varying signal strengths in the receive antennas it is using. The Cell Site will diagnose the radio in question.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-73Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsManual Recovery Actions The symptoms described in “DS1/DFI and T1 Errors- Detailed Description” indicate faults on the T1 facility or faults in the generation of the T1 signal by the remote end. While it is possible that faults in the DS1/DFI can cause these symptoms, they are more likely to be the result of a fault outside of the DS1/DFI.In response to an alarming DS1/DFI that is supplying synchronization for the TDM bus, The Cell Site automatically switches the synchronization reference to another DS1/DFI, if available. If switching the synchronization reference to another DS1/DFI results in no further alarms, the DS1/DFI generating the alarm is probably faulty. In that case, the DS1/DFI generating the alarm should be conditionally restored. If the problem persists after taking this action, the digital facilities termination unit at the remote end is probably faulty; it should be conditionally restored.A technician can check whether a DS1/DFI is operating properly by running a diagnostic test on the DS1/DFI. Or, for T1 operation, a line-related problem can be isolated to either the Cell Site equipment side of the channel service unit (CSU) or the T1 facility side of the CSU by putting the CSU in loopback. If the problem goes away, the T1 facility is at fault. The DS1/DFI port that is looped back should not be supplying system synchronization at the time it is looped.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-74 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsTable 11-4. CAT Errors and Recovery Actions Fault Type Description Automatic Recovery ActionCAT insane* CAT-to-CPU communication brokenIf mate is out-of-service, HEH takes no action other than to unconditionally remove the active CAT; at that point, both CATs would be out-of-service.Assuming mate is in standby, HEH conditionally restores the active CAT to standby, which spawns the following actions:1. A switch request that sets the appropriate control bit in the NCI control register; NCI uses TDMCKSEL con-trol line to move active CAT to standby and mate CAT to active state.2. A remove request that moves standby CAT to out-of-service state.3. A diagnose request that diagnoses out-of-service CAT; if successful, results in CAT being restored to standby state; if not successful, results in CAT remaining in out-of-service state.CAT hardware failure Hardware failures include parts per million (PPM) failure, slip detector failure, slip in local, local reference failure, SD0 failure, and SD1 failure.HEH takes same recovery action as in case of “CAT insane” condition.Loss of Signal Excessive number of slip conditions (10 or more slips during any 5-ms period)HEH switches synchronization reference to another DS1/ DFI if available; otherwise, HEH switches to CAT local source.* The assumption here is that the active CAT is insane. If, in fact, the standby CAT is insane, HEH will conditionally restore the standby CAT to standby—no switching of CAT units will occur.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 11-75Cell Site Hardware Functions and InterconnectionsOr, for E1 operation, assuming that the associated customer-provided network termination unit (NTU) can be put into loopback, a line-related problem can be isolated to either the Cell Site equipment side of the NTU or the E1 facility side of the NTU by putting the NTU in loopback. If the problem goes away, the E1 facility is at fault. The DFI port that is looped back should not be supplying system synchronization at the time it is looped.And finally, for the DFI unit only, if the on-board red and yellow LEDs are lighted, suspect that the line switches on the DFI are set to the wrong settings.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page11-76 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Cell Site Hardware Functions and Interconnections
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-112Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsContents■Contents 12-1■Maintenance Process 12-3Maintenance Objective 12-3Maintenance Activities 12-3Preventive Maintenance 12-3Routine Maintenance 12-3Diagnostic Routines 12-4Visual Inspection 12-4Maintenance Assumptions 12-4Routine Maintenance Procedures List 12-5Fan Screen Cleaning 12-6■Radio Performance Testing 12-7Radio Test Overview 12-7Radio Pretest Procedure 12-7Cable Loss Measurement 12-9Power Measurement 12-12Voice 1004 Hz Deviation Measurement 12-13Post Test Procedure 12-15 Transmitter Output Power Verification 12-16
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsTransmitter Output Power Adjustment 12-16
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-3Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsMaintenance ProcessThe maintenance process consists of those activities designed to minimize the effects of any failure on system performance and to provide the operations personnel with the information and tools to locate and repair troubles rapidly. Operators are provided with the necessary information, such as fault and status information, and the control capability to monitor the system performance and perform the maintenance functions required to meet system reliability.The Cell Site is responsible for fault recognition, fault analysis, fault recovery, and the reporting of faults and hardware maintenance states to the ECP. In those situations where no automatic recovery action is taken or automatic recovery fails, it is the responsibility of the technician to perform manual recovery procedures from the ECP.Maintenance Objective The objective of the maintenance process is to:■Avoid unnecessary system initializations■Avoid unnecessary manual diagnostics■Minimize site visits■Maximize system availability.Maintenance Activities Maintenance activities fall into one of three categories:■Preventive maintenance■Corrective maintenance■Controlled maintenance.Preventive Maintenance Preventive maintenance consists of those activities performed at regular intervals that are designed to identify as soon as possible, potential failure conditions and/or equipment failures. The goal of preventive maintenance is to maintain normal system operations and to prevent loss of service. That goal is achieved by the use of software and manual routines.Software routines include scheduled software diagnostic tests, functional tests, and audits.Routine Maintenance Cell Site routine maintenance tasks are listed in Equipment Test List (ETL). The Cell Site ETL divides Cell Site routines into three categories: (1) Radio and Control Equipment — those routines associated with call processing control and Radio Frequency (RF) transmission; (2) Power Equipment — those routines associated with on-line power supplies, auxiliary power equipment, and monitoring equipment; and (3) Building and Environmental Equipment — those routines associated with temperature and humidity control, fire and safety, emergency lighting, and building alarms.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsThe order in which routines are listed on the ETL is not intended to indicate a sequence for performing routines. Routines are performed at the intervals listed in the Interval column and as described within the routine procedures. The Lucent Technologies Practice contains a reference to the procedural information required to perform the cell site tests.Diagnostic Routines Diagnostic routines are run automatically by system software and are run manually when a unit is suspected of being faulty or when a unit is replaced. Diagnostic tests are run only on off-line units. Lucent Technologies 401-660-101, Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions, contains a complete description of the diagnostic tests. Visual Inspection Visual inspections at the Cell Site should be made on a bimonthly basis. Typical visual indications to look for are listed below: ■Alarm lamp indication ■Smoke ■Broken cables ■Blown fuses ■Overheating ■Out-of-range temperature and humidity. Maintenance Assumptions It is assumed that the technician is familiar with the following or that such conditions are otherwise met: 1. Wrist grounding straps must always be attached before working on any component or handling the Circuit Packs (CPs). This is to prevent or reduce electrostatic discharge that may damage or destroy circuit packs containing integrated circuits. 2. Powering down the failing unit (when required), reseating CPs, powering up the unit, and repeating diagnostics when an initial STF message is received to verify the corrective action. 3. Replacing one CP at a time when several are suspected, then replacing the CP, and repeating the diagnostics. 4. Handling CPs by the edges and the faceplates to avoid damaging contacts and deforming components. 5. Operations of the terminal to include mode changing, page manipulation, and message conventions. 6. Tagging faulty CPs with office location, mounting location, diagnostic phase and test that failed, and date removed.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-5Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests7. All test equipment is known to be functioning properly. 8. A replacement unit or CP is known to be good. 9. Burned out lamps or Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are replaced without instruction. 10. Audible alarms are retired without instruction. Routine Maintenance Procedures List Table 12-1 provides a list of the Routine Maintenance Procedures for the Series II cell. Table 12-1. Routine Maintenance Procedures Routine Maintenance Procedure PerformanceInterval Source DocumentRADIO/CONTROL EQUIPMENT Clean Power Amplifier Cooling 6 mo. 401-201-500 Performance Measurements Perform Setup Radio Performance Measurements 12 mo. 401-660-100 Perform Voice Radio Performance Measurements 12 mo. 401-660-100 Check Reference Generator Frequency 6 mo.POWER AND BATTERY PLANT EQUIPMENTSTORAGE BATTERY Check Float Level 1 mo. 157-629-701 Check Electrolyte Level 1 mo. 157-629-701 Check Cell Voltage 3 mo. 157-629-701 Check Specific Gravity 6 mo. 157-629-701150B BATTERY POWER PLANT Check Float Voltage Alarm 12 mo. 167-609-302 Check Fuse Alarms 12 mo. 167-609-302RECTIFIER (MOD 1)Check High- and Low-Voltage Alarms 12 mo. 169-652-305Check Rectifier Failure Alarm 12 mo. 169-652-305RECTIFIER (MOD II)Check High- and Low-Voltage Alarms 12 mo. 169-609-311Check Rectifier Failure Alarm 12 mo. 169-609-311BUILDING AND ENVIRONMENTAL EQUIPMENTAir Conditioning Check 1 wk. Local proce-dure
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsFan Screen Cleaning Fan screens require checking/cleaning monthly. Screens should be vacuumed clean of dirt and cleaned with soap/water to remove any buildup of dirt. Tower Light Check 1 wk. Local proce-dureHumidifier Check 1 wk. Local proce-dureDehumidifier Check 1 mo. Local proce-dureEmergency Lighting Check 1 mo. Local proce-dureExhaust Fan Check 1 mo. Local proce-dureFire and Safety Equipment Check 1 mo. Local proce-dureAir Dryer Inspection 6 mo. Local proce-dureDust Cell Site Equipment Check 6 mo. Local proce-dureFire Alarm Sensor Cleaning 6 mo. Local proce-durePeripheral Alarms: Door, Fire, AC, Heat Check 6 mo. Local proce-dureSmoke Alarm Check 6 mo. Local proce-dureHeaters Check 12 mo. Local proce-dureTable 12-1. Routine Maintenance Procedures (Contd)Routine Maintenance Procedure PerformanceInterval Source Document
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-7Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsRadio Performance TestingRadio performance testing should be done annually and whenever any component of a transmit path is changed or altered (See Figure 12-1). The procedures for doing radio performance testing are given below. Radio Test Overview This procedure describes radio performance tests for power, frequency, and frequency deviation tests made on the Radio Channel Unit (RCU). This procedure applies to both setup and Voice RCUs (V-RCUs). These tests are designed to be run after an RCU is (1) initially installed and (2) when any component of the transmit path is changed or altered. At the time of initial installation, the Preamplifier and the RCU associated with each Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) are adjusted and power level measurements are made to determine the Effective Radiated Power (ERP) from each LAC. All performance measurements (power, frequency, and deviation) are made at connector J3 (Incident Port) on the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch panel. All of these measurements are recorded in the Cell Site Log to be used as a reference for these tests and other RCU measurements. The value of ERP, input to the transmit (TX) antenna, and the power at J3 on the RTU switch panel should be the same for all RCUs connected to the same LAC. The maximum allowable ERP is 500 watts per channel. These performance tests require a Cell Site to Mobile Switching Center (MSC) data link, the use of a data terminal keyboard, the use of an IFR FM/AM 1500 Communications Service Monitor (CSM) or equivalent, and test cables/adapters. Radio performance measurements are made in the following order: RCU Frequency, RCU Effective Radiated Power, RCU Frequency deviation due to 1004 Hz modulation (voice), RCU Frequency due to Supervisory Auditory Tone (SAT), and RCU Frequency deviation due to 10 kHz (data). Some steps require that input messages be entered. For each input message, there is a corresponding output message response. If an interpretation of a message is needed, refer to the Cell Site Input/Output (I/O) Manual. The power level measurements made at J3 on the RTU switch panel and recorded in the Cell Site log at the time of initial installation are used as a reference for these performance tests. A portion of the power output from each LAC is fed from its directional coupler to the RTU switch panel (J3). Therefore, the power level at J3 is a function of the ERP from any RCU connected to the LAC. That is, all RCUs connected to a given LAC are adjusted to give the same value at J3. When an RCU is replaced, the new RCU output is adjusted to give the same value recorded Radio Pretest ProcedureNOTE:Run a diagnostic test on the Voice Radio Channel Unit (V-RCU) before running this test. Perform the following:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsAt data terminal keyboard: Enter RMV:CELL a,RA b Where: a = Cell Site number (1-222) b = RCU number (0-191) Enter DGN:CELL a,RA b Response: ATP and then ALL TEST PASS Figure 12-1. Voice Channel Test Paths LossCable(-16-.3 to -.6 dBBBN2RCUs on ShelfFrom Other"A"AT&TCombinerTransmit.5 dB Loss)"A"A12PortsPortsA1 thru(Sheet 2)AmplifierLinearFrameToJacksMonitoring654Transmit321531642Tx0SET UPfrom FrameTotal RF OUT0MON.Tx SIG(Xcelite RS3322 or equivalent)Adjustments require small screwdriverble. Release 4.1 makes available a 6-Sector Configuration. The sequence in which each Radiown in Figure 2-6. logged on a Reference Chart at installation - See Reference Chart, Sheet 3. For Release 4.0 OMNIs fixed and is not an option. The way each output "A" port cable (A16, A18, A20) is connected to theouped in groups of four and the RF outputs from each group are wired to an input "A" port on theA16, A18, A20LossCableTx SIG MON.5 dB Loss)(-10.51:9J1BBP-1Combiner(See Note 1 Below)Interconnection Panel AssemblyRF OUTfrom Other1:9 CombinersRF OUTJ3-.3 to -1.2 dB1:9 CombinersFrom OtherJ6J5J4J9J8J7J11J10
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-9Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsFigure 12-2. Voice Channel Test PathsCable Loss Measurement 1. Configure the IFR FM/AM 1500 Communications Service Monitor (CSM) as shown in Table 12-2 and allow 30 minutes warm-up: J40J20J25J45Filter PanelsTransmitFrom OtherJ60J65-40 dB-50 dBCouplerDirectionalReflected Test PortJ2J1Control InterfaceTransmitJ66J46J26J4J3J36J56J16Transmit FilterA maximum of seven antennas may be driven per cell site-OMNI,For each Linear Amplifier unit there is one preamplifier and one 3:1 Combiner.f 720 watts. This gives a total RF outputts - 240 watts per Linear Amplifier Circuits.me can have up to four Linear Amplifier Frame can have up to three Linear The Antenna Interface Frame may use up to seven Transmit Filterrames and Antenna Interface FramesPanels. Duplex Panels may be used.3-Sector, or some combination of OMNI and 3-Sector.n Antenna Configuration and Power Output.J41660CA-1Linear Amplifier Unit - LAU0(See Note 2 Below)LossAs RequiredCable-.4 to -1.1 dBUnit PAOTo Other 3:1 Combiners -(+35biner PDO3 dB Loss)5 dB Gain)* PreamplifierAntenna Interface FrameGain ADJRadio Test Unit Switch PanelForward Test PortJ35J55J15J50J30J10LossCableTransmit Filter Panel-5 dBTable 12-2. Configuration of IFR FM/AM 1500 CSM ATTENUATOR 0 dB DISPLAY ANALY ANALY DISPR 1M DUPLEX/SIMPLEX DUPLEX GEN/REC GEN AVE PEAK/PEAK AVG PEAK MODULATION FM3 DEV-PWR 20 kHz DEV-VERT 5 kHz/DIV dB/DIV 10 GEN/LOCK FULLY CCW INT TONE/RCVR RCVR VOLUME AS DESIRED
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests2. Press Enter on the keyboard. 3. Press RF on the keyboard. Enter 8803200, press Enter on the keyboard. Confirm 880.3200 MHz is displayed. NOTE:For non-wireline company, use 875.0100 MHz. 4. Connect a reference cable from the DUPLEX OUTPUT jack to the ANTENNA jack. 5. The signal should appear near the -40 graticule level. Set the dB/DIV switch to 1 and use the VERT POS control to adjust the reference level so that the peak of the signal is at the -40 graticule level. (After this is done, do not adjust the VERT POS control for any reason while performing the alignment and measurements, otherwise inaccuracies occur.) 6. Disconnect the reference cable from the ANTENNA jack. 7. Connect the test cable and any associated adapters whose loss is to be measured to the ANTENNA jack. Connect the reference cable and the test cable to be measured together using a BNC jack/BNC jack adapter. 8. Read the Radio Frequency (RF) output level at the Cathode Ray Tube (CRT). The loss of the test cable is the difference between the measured output level and the reference level (measured output level minus -40 dBm). Retain this value for subsequent use. 9. In the Cell Site Log or in translations, look up the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) number (0 to 199), assigned channel number, and assigned frequency of the RCU to be tested. 10. If test is to be run from the Cell Site, establish a Cell Site/MSC data link (see procedure covering Cell Site to Mobile Switching Center (MSC) data link).11. Configure the IFR FM/AM 1500 Communications Service Monitor (CSM) as follows: 12. Remove the 50-ohm terminator from J3 (Incident Port) on the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch panel on the Antenna Interface Frame (AIF). SQUELCH FULLY CCW FREQ ERROR 1 kHz RF OUTPUT LEVEL −40 dBm Table 12-2. Configuration of IFR FM/AM 1500 CSM (Contd)ATTENUATOR 0 dB
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-11Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests13. Connect the test cable with a known loss to J3 (Incident Port) on the RTU switch panel on the AIF, using a BNC jack/SMA plug adapter. Connect the other end of the test cable to Communications Service Monitor (CSM) as follows: 14. Tests performed are measurements of transmitter frequency, power output, and frequency deviation on the Voice Radio Channel Units (V-RCUs). Frequency deviation measurements are made for voice, Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT), and data transmissions. 15. All measurements are made at J3 on the RTU switch panel. 16. Effective Radiated Power (ERP) is calculated for the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) under test as a function of the power level at J3. 17. All measurements taken are recorded along with the serial number and calibration date of the test equipment used to perform the tests.18. The value of the power input to the antenna (input from the foam jumper cable) should be the same for all RCUs connected to the same antenna. 19. The maximum allowable Federal Communications Commission's (FCC's) ERP is 500 watts per channel.Table 12-3. Configuration of IFR FM/AM 1500 CDMCONTROL SET TO DISPLAY METER ATTENUATOR 40 dB AVG PEAK/PEAK PEAK MODULATION FM3 DEV-PWR 15 FREQ ERROR 1 kHz ANALY DISPR 10 kHz/DIV DEV-VERT 5 kHz/DEV dB/DIV 10 GEN/LOCK LOCK INT TONE/RCVR RCVR VOLUME As desired SQUELCH FULLY CCW GEN/REC REC DUPLEX/SIMPLEX SIMPLEX
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-12 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests20. On the CSM, press RF and enter the assigned Radio Frequency (RF) of the RCU under test.21. Frequency Measurement22. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; START Response: ALL WENT WELL Where: a = Cell Site number (1-222) n = RCU number (0-191) Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; CONFIG 150 Response: ALL WENT WELL Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; XMITC 300 Response: ALL WENT WELL Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; VRADPC 357 Response: ALL WENT WELL 23. Read the frequency error on the Cathode Ray Tube's (CRT's) Communications Service Monitor (CSM) display. NOTE:If frequency error is small, increase resolution by changing FRQ ERROR to 300 or 100 Hz scale. 24. Is measured frequency less than ± 0.80 kHz? If YES, then record in Cell Site Log and continue to Step 25 for power measurement. If No, then continue to Step 24. 25. Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure. Power Measurement 26. At Communications Service Monitor (CSM), set DISPLAY to ANALY. 27. Read RF level (to the nearest dB) from the center of the Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) Communications Service Monitor (CSM) display. 28. Calculate the power level at J3 (Incident Port) by adding the Test Cable Loss (in dB) to the measured power level above. 29. The level obtained in Step 27 should equal the level recorded in the Cell Site Log (± x dBm) for the LAC associated with the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) under test. Adjust the RCU output until the correct level is obtained. 30. If the RCU under test is an existing RCU or the replacement for an existing RCU, the values recorded in columns 1 through 7 of the Cell Site log are valid. 31. If the RCU is being put into service for the first time, the values to be recorded in columns 1 through 7 are the same as other RCUs on the same Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-13Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsNOTE:If the RCU under test is a setup RCU, go to Step 48. Voice 1004 Hz Deviation Measurement32. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 106 Response: ALL WENT WELL Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 101 Response: ALL WENT WELL 33. At the Communications Service Monitor (CSM) display set DISPLAY to METER, MODULATION to FM2, and DEV to 6 kHz. 34. From the Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) display of the Communications Service Monitor (CSM), read DEV in kHz35. Is measured peak frequency deviation within the limits shown in Table 12-4? Table 12-4. Peak Frequency Deviation Limits Network Transmission Peak Frequency Deviation (kHz) Level –TX (dB)* Nominal Lower Limit Upper Limit +3 5.47 4.99 5.95 +2 5.16 4.71 5.61 +1 4.87 4.45 5.32 0 4.60 4.20 5.00 –1 4.34 3.96 4.72 –2 4.10 3.74 4.46 –3 3.87 3.53 4.21 –4 3.65 3.33 3.97 –5 3.45 3.15 3.75 –6 3.26 2.98 3.54 –7 3.07 2.80 3.34 –8 2.90 2.65 3.15 –9 2.74 2.50 2.98 –10 2.59 2.36 2.82 –11 2.44 2.23 2.65 –12 2.31 2.11 2.51 –13 2.18 1.99 2.37
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-14 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsIf YES, then record in Cell Site Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION DUE TO 1004 Hz MODULATION AT -16 dBm and do Step 36. If NO, then continue to Step 35. 36. Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure. 37. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 102 Response: ALL WENT WELL Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 100 Response: ALL WENT WELL 38. At CSM, set DEV-PWR to 20 kHz. 39. From Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) of CSM, read DEV in kHz. 40. Is measured peak frequency deviation less than or equal to the 12 kHz maximum limit? If YES, then record in Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION DUE TO 1004 Hz MODULATION AT 0 dBm and do Step 41. If NO, then continue to Step 40. 41. Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure. 42. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 102 Response: ALL WENT WELL 43. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 112 Response: ALL WENT WELL 44. At CSM, set DEV-PWR to 6 kHz. 45. From CRT of CSM, read DEV in kHz. 46. Is measured peak frequency deviation within the 1.75 to 2.25 kHz limits? –14 2.05 1.87 2.23 –15 1.94 1.77 2.11 .*The Network Transmission Level - TX 9 (dB) is the value located in the Cell Site data base, cell dB, "Network Transmission Level - TX" in the RC/V (Recent Change & Verify) subsystem. Table 12-4. Peak Frequency Deviation Limits (Contd)Network Transmission Peak Frequency Deviation (kHz)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-15Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsIf YES, then record in Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION DUE TO SAT and do Step 47. If NO, then continue to Step 46. 47. Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure. 48. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; BASEB 113 Response: ALL WENT WELL Data 10 kHz Deviation Measurement 49. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; ECODC 201 Response: ALL WENT WELL 50. At the Communications Service Monitor (CSM), set DEV/PWR to 20 kHz and MODULATION to FM3. 51. Is measured peak frequency deviation within 7.0 to 9.0 kHz limits? If YES, then record in Cell Site Log as PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION DUE TO 10 kHz and do Step 52. If NO, then continue to Step 51. 52. Replace the Radio Channel Unit (RCU) and repeat this procedure. 53. Remove transmission test set from J3. 54. At data terminal keyboard: Enter CFR:CELL a,RA n; ECODC 202 Response: ALL WENT WELL Enter STOP:DGN;CELL a,RA n Response: OOS, MANUAL, RMVD Enter RST:CELL a,RA n NOTE:This procedure must be repeated for each voice channel to be tested. 55. Is this the last voice channel to be tested? If YES, then continue to Step 55. If NO, then go to Pretest. Post Test Procedure 56. In Cell Site Log, record test equipment model, serial number, and calibration date. Record Federal Communications Commission (FCC) radio telephone license number, its expiration date, the date of test, and then sign the Log. 57. Remove and store all test equipment and test cables. 58. STOP. YOU HAVE COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-16 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests Transmitter Output Power VerificationNOTE:Output power is measured at jack J3 on the Radio Test Unit (RTU) switch panel. 1. Verify that the cell's Radio Channel Unit (RCU) equipage per transmitter [Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC)] agrees with the Cell Site Test Record Sheets. Update the sheets with the added Digital Radio Units (DRUs). 2. Specify and verify that the DRU output power is different from the RCU. NOTE:When determining the maximum number of radios that are assigned to a LAC, each DRU should be counted as 1.5 units, and each RCU should be counted as 1.0 units. Ensure that the units added to each transmitter (LAC) does not exceed the LAC's maximum allowable output power. 1. If the Cell Site Test Record Sheet is inaccurate or missing, verify that the transmitter's (LAC) maximum allowable output power is not exceeded. Transmitter Output Power Adjustment2. 1. Connect a test cable of known loss between the CSTS RF IN/OUT jack and jack J3 on the RTU switch panel.NOTE: The CSTS is operated in the manual mode during this subsection. 3. On the CSTS at the Lucent TESTS menu, press EXIT to set the CSTS to the manual mode. While in the manual mode, perform the following procedures: a. Press RESET. b. Select and punch TO SCREEN - SPEC ANL. c. Select and punch CENTER FREQ. d. Enter 882 via the DATA keys, and press ENTER. e. Select and punch REF LEVEL. f. Enter -10 via the DATA keys, and press ENTER. g. Select and punch SPAN. h. Enter 30 via the DATA keys, and press ENTER. i. Select and punch CONTROLS - MAIN. j. Under CHOICES, select and punch AUXILIARY. k. Select and punch CONTROLS - NO PK/AVG. l. Under CHOICES, select and punch AVG 10.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-17Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests4. Enter the value of the RF IN/OUT test cable's loss into the CSTS as follows: a. Press SHIFT. b. Press DUPLEX. c. Select and punch CONFIGURE - RF LEVEL OFFSET. (ON should be underscored.) d. Select and punch CONFIGURE - RF IN/OUT. e. Enter the value of the test cable's loss (as a negative number) via the DATA keys, and press ENTER. f. Press PREV. 5. Choose an AMPS RCU that is assigned to the same transmitter (LAC) as that of the DRU under test.NOTE: The RCU is used as a reference radio for the DRU under test. Choose an RCU that is set to the same full power level value (0 VRAL) to that in which the DRU under test will be adjusted. 6. Configure the reference RCU under test for full power output as follows: NOTE:After each MSC command input, wait for the MSC response message: ALL WENT WELL. RMV:CELL x,RA y;UCL (where x=cell number; y=radio number)CFR:CELL x,RA y;START CFR:CELL x,RA y;CONFIG 150 CFR:CELL x,RA y;XMITC 300 CFR:CELL x,RA y;VRADPC 3577. Configure the RCU under test for full power output as follows: After each MSC command input, wait for the MSC response message: ALL WENT WELL. RMV:CELL x,RA y;UCL (where x=cell number; y=radio number)CFR:CELL x,RA y;START CFR:CELL x,RA y;CONFIG 150 CFR:CELL x,RA y;XMITC 300 CFR:CELL x,RA y;VRADPC 3578. Ensure that the DRU under test's AUTO/OFF switch is set to AUTO. 9. Identify the reference RCU and the DRU under test on the CSTS's display.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-18 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsNOTE:If multiple radios are in service, their signals will also be present on the display. Momentarily set the RCU's and/or DRU's AUTO/OFF switch to OFF to help to identify the signals. 10. On the Lucent CSTS, perform the following procedures: a. Select and punch CONTROLS - AUXILIARY. b. Under CHOICES, select and punch MARKER. c. Select and punch MARKER TO - NEXT PEAK multiple times until the display's marker is positioned on the peak of the reference RCU's signal. d. Record the MARKER LVL (dbm) as displayed on the CSTS's display(upper right corner). e. Select and punch MARKER TO - NEXT PEAK multiple times until the display's marker is positioned on the peak of the DRU under test's signal. 11. Slowly adjust the potentiometer on the front of the DRU under test until the DRU's signal level matches the reference RCU's level as displayed by MARKER LVL. NOTE:Because of the video averaging effect, the CSTS's response to adjusting the DRU's level is delayed. To improve the response, press MEAS RESET during the measurement. 12. Set the DRU under test's AUTO/OFF switch to OFF. 13. Repeat Step 6 through Step 12 under the Transmitter Output Power Adjustment section for all other newly installed DRUs that are assigned to the transmitter (LAC) under test. 14. Terminate the reference RCU as follows: STOP:CFR;CELL X,RA Y (where X=cell number; Y=radio number)RST:CELL X,RA Y;UCL
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-19Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance TestsTable 12-5. Channel Number Center FrequenciesChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber 1 870.030 825.030 44 871.320 826.320 2 870.060 825.060 45 871.350 826.350 3 870.090 825.090 46 871.380 826.380 4 870.120 825.120 47 871.410 826.410 5 870.150 825.150 48 871.440 826.440 6 870.180 825.180 49 871.470 826.470 7 870.210 825.210 50 871.500 826.500 8 870.240 825.240 51 871.530 826.530 9 870.270 825.270 52 871.560 826.560 10 870.300 825.300 53 871.590 826.590 11 870.330 825.330 54 871.620 826.620 12 870.360 825.360 55 871.650 826.650 13 870.390 825.390 56 871.680 826.680 14 870.420 825.420 57 871.710 826.710 15 870.450 825.450 58 871.740 826.740 16 870.480 825.480 59 871.770 826.770 17 870.510 825.510 60 871.800 826.800 18 870.540 825.540 61 871.830 826.830 19 870.570 825.570 62 871.860 826.860 20 870.600 825.600 63 871.890 826.890 21 870.630 825.630 64 871.920 826.920 22 870.660 825.660 65 871.950 826.950 23 870.690 825.690 66 871.980 826.980 24 870.720 825.720 67 872.010 827.010 25 870.750 825.750 68 872.040 827.040 26 870.780 825.780 69 872.070 827.070 27 870.810 825.810 70 872.100 827.100
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-20 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests28 870.840 825.840 71 872.130 827.130 29 870.870 825.870 72 872.160 827.160 30 870.900 825.900 73 872.190 827.190 31 870.930 825.930 74 872.220 827.220 32 870.960 825.960 75 872.250 827.250 33 870.990 825.990 76 872.280 827.280 34 871.020 826.020 77 872.310 827.310 35 871.050 826.050 78 872.340 827.340 36 871.080 826.080 79 872.370 827.370 37 871.110 826.110 80 872.400 827.400 38 871.140 826.140 81 872.430 827.430 39 871.170 826.170 82 872.460 827.460 40 871.200 826.200 83 872.490 827.490 41 871.230 826.230 84 872.520 827.520 42 871.260 826.260 85 872.550 827.550 43 871.290 826.290 86 872.580 827.580 87 872.610 827.610 129 873.870 828.870 88 872.640 827.640 130 873.900 828.900 89 872.670 827.670 131 873.930 828.930 90 872.700 827.700 132 873.960 828.960 91 872.730 827.730 133 873.990 828.990 92 872.760 827.760 134 874.020 829.020 93 872.790 827.790 135 874.050 829.050 94 872.820 827.820 136 874.080 829.080 95 872.850 827.850 137 874.110 829.110 96 872.880 827.880 138 874.140 829.140 97 872.910 827.910 139 874.170 829.170 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-21Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests 98 872.940 827.940 140 874.200 829.200 99 872.970 827.970 141 874.230 829.230 100 873.000 828.000 142 874.260 829.260 101 873.030 828.030 143 874.290 829.290 102 873.060 828.060 144 874.320 829.320 103 873.090 828.090 145 874.350 829.350 104 873.120 828.120 146 874.380 829.380 105 873.150 828.150 147 874.410 829.410 106 873.180 828.180 148 874.440 829.440 107 873.210 828.210 149 874.470 829.470 108 873.240 828.240 150 874.500 829.500 109 873.270 828.270 151 874.530 829.530 110 873.300 828.300 152 874.560 829.560 111 873.330 828.330 153 874.590 829.590 112 873.360 828.360 154 874.620 829.620 113 873.390 828.390 155 874.650 829.650 114 873.420 828.420 156 874.680 829.680 115 873.450 828.450 157 874.710 829.710 116 873.480 628.480 158 874.740 829.740 117 873.510 828.510 159 874.770 829.770 118 873.540 828.540 160 874.800 829.800 119 873.570 828.570 161 874.830 829.830 120 873.600 828.600 162 874.860 829.860 121 873.630 828.630 163 874.890 829.890 122 873.660 828.660 164 874.920 829.920 123 873.690 828.690 165 874.950 829.950 124 873.720 828.720 166 874.980 829.980 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-22 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests125 873.750 828.750 167 875.010 830.010 126 873.780 828.780 168 875.040 830.040 127 873.810 828.810 169 875.070 830.070 128 873.840 828.640 170 875.100 830.100 171 875.130 830.130 214 876.420 831.420 172 875.160 830.160 215 876.450 831.450 173 875.190 830.190 216 876.480 831.480 174 875.220 830.220 217 876.510 831.510 175 875.250 830.250 218 876.540 831.540 176 875.280 830.280 219 876.570 831.570 177 875.310 830.310 220 876.600 831.600 178 875.340 830.340 221 876.630 831.630 179 875.370 830.370 222 876.660 831.660 180 875.400 830.400 223 876.690 831.690 181 875.430 830.430 224 876.720 831.720 182 875.460 830.460 225 876.750 831.750 183 875.490 830.490 226 876.780 831.780 184 875.520 830.520 227 876.810 831.810 185 875.550 830.550 228 876.840 831.840 186 875.580 830.580 229 876.870 831.870 187 875.610 830.610 230 876.900 831.900 188 875.640 830.640 231 876.930 831.930 189 875.670 830.670 232 876.960 831.960 190 875.700 830.700 233 876.990 831.990 191 875.730 830.730 234 877.020 832.020 192 875.760 830.760 235 877.050 832.050 193 875.790 830.790 236 877.080 832.080 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-23Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests194 875.820 830.820 237 877.110 832.110 195 875.850 830.850 238 877.140 832.140 196 875.880 830.880 239 877.170 832.170 197 875.910 830.910 240 877.200 832.200 198 875.940 830.940 241 877.230 832.230 199 875.970 830.970 242 877.260 832.260 200 876.000 831.000 243 877.290 832.290 201 876.030 831.030 244 877.320 832.320 202 876.060 831.060 245 877.350 832.350 203 876.090 831.090 246 877.380 832.380 204 876.120 831.120 247 877.410 832.410 205 876.150 831.150 248 877.440 832.440 206 876.180 831.180 249 877.470 832.470 207 876.210 831.210 250 877.500 832.500 208 876.240 831.240 251 877.530 832.530 209 876.270 831.270 252 877.560 832.560 210 876.300 831.300 253 877.590 832.590 211 876.330 831.330 254 877.620 832.620 212 876.360 831.360 255 877.650 832.650 213 876.390 831.390 256 877.680 832.680 257 877.710 832.710 300 879.000 834.000 258 877.740 832.740 301 879.030 834.030 259 877.770 832.770 302 879.060 834.060 260 877.800 832.800 303 879.090 834.090 261 877.830 832.830 304 879.120 834.120 262 877.860 832.860 305 879.150 834.150 263 877.890 832.890 306 879.180 834.180 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-24 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests264 877.920 832.920 307 879.210 834.210 265 877.950 832.950 308 879.240 834.240 266 877.980 832.980 309 879.270 834.270 267 878.010 833.010 310 879.300 834.300 268 878.040 833.040 311 879.330 834.330 269 878.070 833.070 312 879.360 834.360 270 878.100 833.100 313 879.390 834.390 271 878.130 833.130 314 879.420 834.420 272 878.160 833.160 315 879.450 834.450 273 878.190 833.190 316 879.480 834.480 274 878.220 833.220 317 879.510 834.510 275 878.250 833.250 318 879.540 834.540 276 878.280 833.280 319 879.570 834.570 277 878.310 833.310 320 879.600 834.600 278 878.340 833.340 321 879.630 834.630 279 878.370 833.370 322 879.660 834.660 280 878.400 833.400 323 879.690 834.690 281 878.430 833.430 324 879.720 834.720 282 878.460 833.460 325 879.750 834.750 283 878.490 833.490 326 879.780 834.780 284 878.520 833.520 327 879.810 834.810 285 878.550 833.550 328 879.840 834.840 286 878.580 833.580 329 879.870 834.870 287 878.610 833.610 330 879.900 834.900 288 878.640 833.640 331 879.930 834.930 289 878.670 833.670 332 879.960 834.960 290 878.700 833.700 333 879.990 834.990 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-25Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests291 878.730 833.730 334 880.020 835.020 292 878.760 833.760 335 880.050 835.050 293 878.790 833.790 336 880.080 835.080 294 878.820 833.820 337 880.110 835.110 295 878.850 833.850 338 880.140 835.140 296 878.880 833.880 339 880.170 835.170 297 878.910 833.910 340 880.200 835.200 298 878.940 833.940 341 880.230 835.230 299 878.970 833.970 342 880.260 835.260 343 880.290 835.290 385 881.550 836.550 344 880.320 835.320 386 881.580 836.580 345 880.350 835.350 387 881.610 836.610 346 880.380 835.380 388 881.640 836.640 347 880.410 835.410 389 881.670 836.670 348 880.440 835.440 390 881.700 836.700 349 880.470 835.470 391 881.730 836.730 350 880.500 835.500 392 881.760 836.760 351 880.530 835.530 393 881.790 836.790 352 880.560 835.560 394 881.820 836.820 353 880.590 835.590 395 881.850 836.850 354 880.620 835.620 396 881.880 836.880 355 880.650 835.650 397 881.910 836.910 356 880.680 835.660 398 881.940 836.940 357 880.710 835.710 399 881.970 836.970 358 880.740 835.740 400 882.000 837.000 359 880.770 835.770 401 882.030 837.030 360 880.800 835.800 402 882.060 837.060 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-26 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests361 880.830 835.830 403 882.090 837.090 362 880.860 835.860 404 882.120 837.120 363 880.890 835.890 405 882.150 837.150 364 880.920 835.920 406 882.180 837.180 365 880.950 835.950 407 882.210 837.210 366 880.980 835.980 408 882.240 837.240 367 881.010 836.010 409 882.270 837.270 368 881.040 836.040 410 882.300 837.300 369 881.070 836.070 411 882.330 837.330 370 881.100 836.100 412 882.360 837.360 371 881.130 836.130 413 882.390 837.390 372 881.160 836.160 414 882.420 837.420 373 881.190 836.190 415 882.450 837.450 374 881.220 836.220 416 882.480 837.480 375 881.250 836.250 417 882.510 837.510 376 881.280 836.280 418 882.540 837.540 377 881.310 836.310 419 882.570 837.570 378 881.340 836.340 420 882.600 837.600 379 881.370 836.370 421 882.630 837.630 380 881.400 836.400 422 882.660 837.660 381 881.430 836.430 423 882.690 837.690 382 881.460 836.460 424 882.720 837.720 383 881.490 836.490 425 882.750 837.750 384 881.520 836.520 426 882.780 837.780 427 882.810 837.810 469 884.070 839.070 428 882.840 837.840 470 884.100 839.100 429 882.870 837.870 471 884.130 839.130 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-27Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests430 882.900 837.900 472 884.160 839.160 431 882.930 837.930 473 884.190 839.190 432 882.960 837.960 474 884.220 839.220 433 882.990 837.990 475 884.250 839.250 434 883.020 837.020 476 884.280 839.280 435 883.050 838.050 477 884.310 839.310 436 883.080 838.080 478 884.340 839.340 437 883.110 838.110 479 884.370 839.370 438 883.140 838.140 480 884.400 839.400 439 883.170 838.170 481 884.430 839.430 440 883.200 838.200 482 884.460 839.460 441 883.230 838.230 483 884.490 839.490 442 883.260 838.260 484 884.520 839.520 443 883.290 838.290 485 884.550 839.550 444 883.320 838.320 486 884.580 839.580 445 883.350 838.350 487 884.610 839.610 446 883.380 838.380 488 884.640 839.640 447 883.410 838.410 489 884.670 839.670 448 883.440 838.440 490 884.700 839.700 449 883.470 838.470 491 884.730 839.730 450 883.500 838.500 492 884.760 839.760 451 883.530 838.530 493 884.790 839.790 452 883.560 838.560 494 884.029 839.820 453 883.590 838.590 495 884.850 839.850 454 883.620 838.620 496 884.880 839.880 455 883.650 838.650 497 884.910 839.910 456 883.680 838.680 498 884.940 839.940 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-28 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests457 883.710 838.710 499 884.910 839.970 458 883.740 838.740 500 885.300 840.000 459 883.770 838.770 501 885.030 840.030 460 883.800 838.800 502 885.060 840.060 461 883.830 838.830 503 885.090 840.090 462 883.860 838.860 504 885.120 840.120 463 883.890 838.890 505 885.150 840.150 464 883.920 838.920 506 885.180 840.180 465 883.950 838.950 507 885.210 840.210 466 883.980 838.980 508 885.240 840.240 467 884.010 839.010 509 885.270 840.270 468 864.040 839.040 510 885.300 840.300 511 885.330 840.330 553 886.590 841.590 512 885.360 840.360 554 886.620 841.620 513 885.390 840.390 555 886.650 841.650 514 885.420 840.420 556 886.680 841.680 515 885.450 840.450 557 886.710 841.710 516 885.480 840.480 558 886.740 841.740 517 885.510 840.510 559 886.770 841.770 518 885.540 840.540 560 886.800 841.800 519 885.570 840.570 561 886.630 841.830 520 885.600 840.600 562 886.860 841.860 521 885.630 840.630 563 886.890 841.890 522 885.660 840.660 564 886.920 841.920 523 885.690 840.690 565 886.950 841.950 524 685.720 840.720 566 886.980 841.980 525 885.750 840.750 567 887.010 842.010 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-29Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests526 885.780 840.780 568 887.040 842.040 527 885.810 840.810 569 887.070 842.070 528 885.840 840.840 570 887.100 842.100 529 885.870 840.870 571 887.130 842.130 530 885.900 840.900 572 887.160 842.160 531 885.930 840.930 573 887.190 842.190 532 885.960 840.960 574 887.220 842.220 533 885.990 840.990 575 887.250 842.250 534 886.020 841.020 576 887.280 842.280 535 886.050 841.050 577 887.310 842.310 536 886.080 841.080 578 887.340 842.340 537 886.110 841.110 579 887.370 842.370 538 886.140 841.140 580 887.400 842.400 539 886.170 841.170 581 887.430 842.430 540 886.200 841.200 582 887.460 842.460 541 886.230 841.230 583 887.490 842.490 542 886.260 841.260 584 887.520 842.520 543 886.290 841.290 585 887.550 842.550 544 886.320 841.320 586 887.580 842.580 545 886.350 841.350 587 887.610 842.610 546 886.380 841.380 588 887.640 842.640 547 886.410 841.410 589 887.670 842.670 548 886.440 841.440 590 887.700 842.700 549 886.470 841.470 591 887.730 842.730 550 886.500 841.500 592 887.760 842.760 551 886.530 841.530 593 887.790 842.790 552 886.560 841.560 594 887.820 842.820 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-30 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests595 887.850 842.850 636 889.080 844.080 596 887.880 842.880 637 889.110 844.110 597 887.910 842.910 638 889.140 844.140 598 887.940 842.940 639 889.170 844.170 599 887.970 842.970 640 889.200 844.200 600 888.000 843.000 641 889.230 844.230 601 886.030 843.030 642 889.260 844.260 602 888.060 843.060 643 889.290 844.290 603 888.090 843.090 644 889.320 844.320 604 888.120 843.120 645 889.350 844.350 605 888.150 843.150 646 889.380 844.380 606 888.180 843.180 647 889.410 844.410 607 888.210 843.210 648 889.440 844.440 608 888.240 843.240 649 889.470 844.470 609 888.270 843.270 650 889.500 844.500 610 888.300 843.300 651 889.530 844.530 611 888.330 843.330 652 889.560 844.560 612 888.360 843.360 653 889.590 844.590 613 888.390 843.390 654 889.620 844.620 614 888.420 843.420 655 889.650 844.650 615 888.450 843.450 656 889.680 844.680 616 888.480 843.480 657 889.710 844.710 617 888.510 843.510 658 889.740 844.740 618 888.540 843.540 659 889.770 844.770 619 886.570 843.570 660 889.800 844.800 620 888.600 843.600 661 889.830 844.830 621 888.630 843.630 662 869.860 844.860 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-31Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests622 888.660 843.660 663 689.890 844.890 623 886.690 843.690 664 889.920 844.920 624 888.720 843.720 665 889.950 844.950 625 888.750 843.750 666 689.980 844.980 626 888.780 843.780 667 890.010 845.010 627 888.810 843.810 668 890.040 845.040 628 888.840 843.840 669 890.070 845.070 629 888.870 843.870 670 890.100 845.100 630 888.900 843.900 671 890.130 845.130 631 888.930 843.930 672 890.160 845.160 632 888.960 843.960 673 890.190 845.190 633 888.990 843.990 674 890.220 845.220 634 889.020 844.020 675 890.250 845.250 635 889.050 844.050 676 890.280 845.200 677 890.310 845.310 718 891.540 846.540 678 890.340 845.340 719 891.570 846.570 679 890.370 845.370 720 891.600 846.600 680 890.400 845.400 721 891.630 846.630 681 890.430 845.430 722 891.660 846.660 682 890.460 845.460 723 891.690 846.690 683 890.490 845.490 724 891.720 846.720 684 890.520 845.520 725 891.750 846.750 685 890.550 845.550 726 891.780 846.780 686 890.580 845.580 727 891.810 846.810 687 890.610 845.610 728 891.840 846.840 688 890.640 845.640 729 891.870 846.870 689 890.670 845.670 730 891.900 846.900 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-32 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests690 890.700 845.700 731 891.930 846.930 691 890.730 845.730 732 891.960 846.960 692 890.760 845.760 733 891.990 846.990 693 890.790 845.790 734 892.020 847.020 694 890.820 845.820 735 892.050 847.050 695 890.850 845.850 736 892.080 847.080 696 890.680 845.880 737 892.110 847.110 697 890.910 845.910 738 892.140 847.140 698 890.940 845.940 739 892.170 847.170 699 890.970 845.970 740 892.200 847.200 700 891.000 846.000 741 892.230 847.230 701 891.030 848.030 742 892.260 847.260 702 891.060 846.060 743 892.290 847.290 703 891.090 846.090 744 892.320 847.320 704 891.120 846.120 745 892.350 847.350 705 891.150 846.150 746 892.380 847.380 706 891.180 846.180 747 892.410 847.410 707 891.210 846.210 748 892.440 847.440 708 891.240 846.240 749 892.470 847.470 709 891.270 846.270 750 892.500 847.500 710 891.300 846.300 751 892.530 847.530 711 891.330 846.330 752 892.560 847.580 712 891.360 846.360 753 892.590 847.590 713 891.390 846.390 754 892.620 847.620 714 891.420 846.420 755 892.650 847.650 715 891.450 846.450 756 892.680 847.680 716 891.480 846.480 757 892.710 847.710 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-33Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests717 891.510 846.510 758 892.740 847.740 759 892.770 847.770 796 893.860 848.860 760 892.800 847.800 797 893.910 848.910 761 892.830 847.830 798 893.940 848.940 762 892.860 847.860 799 893.970 848.970 763 892.890 847.890 991 869.040 824.040 764 892.920 847.920 992 869.070 824.070 765 892.950 847.950 993 869.100 824.100 766 892.980 847.980 994 869.130 824.130 767 893.010 848.010 995 869.160 824.160 768 893.040 848.040 996 869.190 824.190 769 893.070 848.070 997 869.220 824.220 770 893.100 848.100 998 869.250 824.250 771 893.130 848.130 999 869.280 824.280 772 893.160 848.160 1000 869.310 824.310 773 893.190 848.190 1001 869.340 824.340 774 893.220 848.220 1002 869.370 824.370 775 893.250 848.250 1003 869.400 824.400 776 893.280 848.280 1004 869.430 824.430 777 893.310 848.310 1005 869.460 824.460 778 893.340 848.340 1006 869.490 824.490 779 893.370 848.370 1007 869.520 824.520 780 893.400 848.400 1008 869.550 824.550 781 893.430 848.430 1009 869.580 824.580 782 893.460 848.460 1010 869.610 824.610 783 893.490 848.490 1011 869.640 824.640 784 893.520 848.520 1012 869.670 824.670 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-34 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests 785 893.550 848.550 1013 869.700 824.700 786 893.580 848.580 1014 869.730 824.730 787 893.610 848.610 1015 869.760 824.760 788 893.640 848.640 1016 869.790 824.790 789 893.670 848.670 1017 869.820 824.820 790 893.700 848.700 1018 869.850 824.850 791 893.730 848.730 1019 869.880 824.880 792 893.760 848.760 1020 869.910 824.910 793 893.790 848.790 1021 869.940 824.940 794 893.820 848.820 1022 869.970 824.970 795 893.850 848.850 1023 870.000 825.000 Table 12-6. Watts-to-dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm 0.50 27.0 1.32 31.2 3.55 35.5 9.77 39.9 0.51 27.1 1.35 31.3 3.63 35.6 10.0 40.0 0.52 27.2 1.38 31.4 3.72 35.7 10.2 40.1 0.54 27.3 1.41 31.5 3.80 35.8 10.4 40.2 0.55 27.4 1.45 31.6 3.89 35.9 10.7 40.3 0.56 27.5 1.48 31.7 3.98 36.0 10.9 40.4 0.50 27.6 1.51 31.0 4.07 36.1 11.22 40.5 0.59 27.7 1.55 3.19 4.17 36.2 11.48 40.6 0.60 27.8 1.58 32.0 4.27 36.3 11.75 40.7 0.62 27.9 1.62 32.1 4.37 36.4 12.02 40.8 0.63 28.0 1.66 32.2 4.47 36.5 12.30 40.9 0.65 28.1 1.70 32.3 4.57 36.6 12.59 41.0 0.66 28.2 1.74 32.4 4.68 36.7 12.88 41.1 0.68 28.3 1.78 32.5 4.79 36.8 13.18 41.2 0.69 28.4 1.82 32.6 4.90 36.9 13.49 41.3 Table 12-5. Channel Number Center Frequencies (Contd)ChannelNumber Center Freq(MHz) Cell Site Subscriber ChannelNumber Center Freq (MHz) Cell Site Subscriber
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-35Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests0.71 28.5 1.86 32.7 5.01 37.0 13.80 41.4 0.72 28.6 1.91 32.8 5.13 37.1 14.13 41.5 0.74 28.7 1.95 32.9 5.25 37.2 14.45 41.6 0.76 28.8 2.00 33.0 5.37 37.3 14.79 41.7 0.78 28.9 2.04 33.1 5.50 37.4 15.14 41.8 0.79 29.0 2.09 33.2 5.62 37.5 15.49 41.9 0.81 29.1 2.14 33.3 5.75 37.6 15.85 42.0 0.83 29.2 2.19 33.4 5.89 37.7 16.22 42.1 0.85 29.3 2.24 33.5 6.03 37.8 16.60 42.2 0.87 29.4 2.29 33.6 6.17 37.9 16.98 42.3 0.89 29.5 2.34 33.7 6.31 38.0 17.38 42.4 0.91 29.6 2.40 33.8 6.46 38.1 17.78 42.5 0.93 29.7 2.45 33.9 6.61 30.2 18.20 42.6 0.95 29.8 2.51 34.0 6.76 38.3 18.62 42.7 0.90 29.9 2.57 34.1 6.92 38.4 19.05 42.8 1.00 30.0 2.63 34.2 7.08 38.5 19.50 42.9 1.02 30.1 2.69 34.3 7.24 38.6 19.95 43.0 1.05 30.2 2.75 34.4 7.41 38.7 20.89 43.2 1.07 30.3 2.82 34.5 7.59 38.8 21.38 43.3 1.10 30.4 2.95 34.7 7.76 38.9 21.88 43.4 1.12 30.5 3.02 34.8 7.94 39.0 22.39 43.5 1.15 30.6 3.09 34.9 8.32 39.2 22.91 43.6 1.17 30.7 3.16 35.0 8.51 39.3 23.44 43.7 1.20 30.8 3.24 35.1 8.71 39.4 23.99 43.8 1.23 30.9 3.31 35.2 8.91 39.5 24.55 43.9 1.26 31.0 3.39 35.3 9.12 39.6 25.12 44.0 1.29 31.1 3.47 35.4 9.55 39.8 25.70 44.1 26.30 44.2 70.79 48.5 186.20 52.7 26.30 44.2 26.92 44.3 72.44 48.6 190.54 52.8 26.92 44.3 27.54 44.4 74.13 48.7 194.98 52.9 27.54 44.4 28.18 44.5 75.85 48.8 199.52 53.0 28.18 44.5 28.84 44.6 77.62 48.9 204.17 53.1 28.84 44.6 29.51 44.7 79.43 49.0 208.92 53.2 29.51 44.7 Table 12-6. Watts-to-dBm (Contd)Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-36 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests30.90 44.9 81.28 49.1 213.79 53.3 30.90 44.9 31.62 45.0 83.17 49.2 218.77 53.4 31.62 45.0 32.36 45.1 85.11 49.3 223.87 53.5 32.36 45.1 33.11 45.2 87.09 49.4 229.08 53.6 33.11 45.2 33.88 45.3 89.12 49.5 234.42 53.7 33.88 45.3 34.67 45.4 91.20 49.6 239.88 53.8 34.67 45.4 35.48 45.5 93.32 49.7 245.47 53.9 35.48 45.5 36.31 45.6 95.49 49.8 251.18 54.0 36.31 45.6 37.15 45.7 97.72 49.9 263.02 54.2 37.15 45.7 38.02 45.8 100.00 50.0 269.15 54.3 38.02 45.8 38.90 45.9 102.32 50.1 275.42 54.4 38.90 45.9 39.81 46.0 104.71 50.2 281.83 54.5 39.81 46.0 40.74 46.1 107.15 50.3 288.40 54.6 40.74 46.1 41.69 46.2 109.64 50.4 295.12 54.7 41.69 46.2 42.66 46.3 112.20 50.5 301.99 54.8 42.66 46.3 43.65 46.4 114.81 50.6 309.02 54.9 43.65 46.4 44.67 46.5 117.48 50.7 316.22 55.0 44.67 46.5 45.71 46.6 120.22 50.8 323.59 55.1 45.71 46.6 46.77 46.7 123.02 50.9 331.13 55.2 46.77 46.7 47.86 46.8 125.89 51.0 338.84 55.3 47.86 46.8 48.98 46.9 128.82 51.1 346.73 55.4 48.98 46.9 50.11 47.1 131.82 51.2 354.81 55.5 50.11 47.1 51.28 47.1 134.89 51.3 363.07 55.6 51.28 47.1 52.48 47.2 138.03 51.4 371.53 55.7 52.48 47.2 53.70 473 141.25 51.5 380.18 55.8 53.70 473 54.95 47.4 144.54 51.6 389.04 55.9 54.95 47.4 56.23 47.5 147.91 51.7 398.10 56.0 56.23 47.5 57.54 47.6 151.35 51.8 407.38 56.1 57.54 47.6 58.88 47.7 154.88 51.9 416.86 56.2 58.88 47.7 60.25 47.8 158.48 52.0 426.57 56.3 60.25 47.8 61.65 47.9 162.18 52.1 436.51 56.4 61.65 47.9 63.09 48.0 165.95 52.2 446.68 56.5 63.09 48.0 Table 12-6. Watts-to-dBm (Contd)Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-37Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests66.06 48.2 173.78 52.4 467.73 56.7 66.06 48.2 67.60 48.3 177.82 52.5 478.63 56.8 67.60 48.3 69.18 48.4 181.97 52.6 489.77 56.9 69.18 48.4 Table 12-6. Watts-to-dBm (Contd)Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Watts dBm Table 12-7. Cell Site Station Log Format (Sheet 1 of 2)AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD Date _________ Page 1 of _____ Cell Site Identification _________________ Operator's Signature _____________ Equipment Used _____________________ Calibration Date ______________ Signal level at the J3 port of the RTU Switch Panel for LAC 0 _________ dBm Radio ID Carrier Power Level Peak Frequency Deviation Frequency R S S Chan Channel Meas Foam Foam Input Eff 1004 1004 SAT 10 kHz C H L No Frequency Freq Jmpr Jmpr to TX Rad -16 0.0 kHz 0 dBm F E O MHz Err Watts dBm Ant Pwr dBm dBm kHz L T Hz dBm (ERP) kHz kHz F (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) SETUP - RCUs VOICE - RCUs
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-38 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests Table 12-7. Cell Site Station Log Format (Contd) (Sheet 1 of 2)AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD Table 12-8. Cell Site Station Log Format (Sheet 2 of 2)AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD (continued) Page _____ of _____ Radio ID Carrier Power Level Peak Frequency Deviation Frequency R S S Chan Channel Meas Foam Foam Input Eff 1004 1004 SAT 10 kHzC H L No Frequency Freq Jmpr Jmpr to TX Rad -16 0.0 kHz 0 dBmF E O MHz Err Watts dBm Ant Pwr dBm dBm kHz L T Hz dBm (ERP) kHz kHz F (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) VOICE - RCUs
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 12-39Routine Maintenance and Radio Performance Tests Table 12-8. Cell Site Station Log Format (Contd)(Sheet 2 of 2)AUTOPLEX Cell Site TEST RECORD
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page12-40 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 13-113Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesContents■Contents 13-1■Improved Boot Read-Only Memory (ROM) / Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Update 13-2■NVM Image for Single-Board RCU (SBRCU) 13-3■Keying Multiple RCU Transmitters 13-4■Opening Transmit and Receive Audio 13-5■Cell Site Power Measurements 13-6■Transmit and Receive Audio Level Measurements 13-7■Supervisory Audio and Signaling Tone Detection 13-8■Remote Data Link Reconfiguration 13-9
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page13-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesImproved Boot Read-Only Memory (ROM) / Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) UpdateRadio hardware self-identification is built into the Boot ROMs of the SBRCU, DRU, and EDRU. They are all capable of returning codes that identify their hardware type. Using this information, NVM updates are now performed as follows:■The decision is made at the MSC to perform an NVM update.■The Executive Cellular Processor (ECP) requests the Radio Control Complex (RCC) at the Cell Site (CS) to identify the radio’s hardware type.■The RCC sends a command to read the radio’s Boot ROM and returns the code identifying the radio’s hardware type to the ECP. The SBRCU, DRU, and EDRU all return their unique identifier codes. Because of its older technology, the RCU will not respond. The NVM update process takes this into account.■The RCC returns the radio’s hardware identification to the ECP.■The ECP downloads the NVM image.If the hardware identification received by the ECP does not match the type stored in the NVM DataBase, the NVM update is not performed.For existing radios, this feature ensures that no radio is put out of service or damaged because of an incorrect NVM. For the installation of future radios, this feature supports the use of various differing radio technologies with the assurance that their NVM updates will be performed correctly.The MSC software subsystems affected by the improved Boot ROM / NVM Update are RCV, TR, TI, and NVM.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 13-3Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesNVM Image for Single-Board RCU (SBRCU)The improved Boot ROM / NVM Update feature also supports the SBRCU and greatly increases its capacity. The SBRCU has 64K of RAM. The RCU has 16K of RAM. Previously, because the SBRCU did not have an NVM image of its own, it used the RCU image.After the RCU image was downloaded into the SBRCU, the SBRCU was left with 48K of RAM (64 - 16 = 48). This 48K of RAM was left unusable because as far as the RCU’s NVM image was concerned it did not exist. The 48K RAM was not recognized by the RCU’s NVM image and could not be accessed and used for enhancements or new AMPS features. The new SBRCU image can recognize and therefore utilize all of the SBRCU’s RAM and can, therefore, support and implement enhancements and new features developed for the SBRCU.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page13-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesKeying Multiple RCU TransmittersStarting with Series II Cell Site Release 4.3, the CFR command provided the capability to turn on transmitters of several Radio Channel Units (RCUs) simultaneously. The following options are available:■Turn on any number (one to all) of RCU transmitters of a cell site by executing several CONFIG options sequentially.■A single CONFIG option can specify adding/removing all the RCUs on a specified transmit face having a Linear Amplifier Circuit (LAC) and/or Lightwave Microcell Transceiver (LMT).■A single CONFIG option can specify adding/removing up to 16 individual RCUs.The cell site software stores the operational state of each RCU, then removes the RCU from service. At the end of the session, all the RCUs that are in the session are unconditionally restored to the operational state at the time they were last added to the session. When multiple RCUs are turned on, only the CONFIG, VRADPC, XMITC, START, and STOP options are supported. All the RCUs in the session are given the same treatment for the XMITC and VRADPC options.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 13-5Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesOpening Transmit and Receive AudioRelease 4.3 also supports an additional option of the CFR command that allows the opening of the RCU transmit/receive audio while maintaining the voice connections to a specified DS1/DS0. The RCU under test has to be out-of-service. This feature connects the Voice RCU (V-RCU) to a specified DS0/1. The cell ensures that the specified DS0/1 is unassigned or is currently assigned to the specified RCU. This feature can perform receiver sensitivity tests and can verify the effect of network transmission and receive level parameters in translations.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page13-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesCell Site Power Measurements Beginning with Release 4.3, the cell site can perform transmit and receive power level measurements at the specified Radio Frequency (RF) levels and report them to the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The request is issued by the MEAS:CELL command, which supports various options including the RF level and EXT. The EXT option allows the use of external test equipment to generate the test signal or to detect the RCU signal. When EXT is not specified, the Radio Test Unit (RTU) generates and detects the test signal.The feature also supports a range of RCUs to perform the measurements. For each requested RCU, the feature sequentially repeats the following process at the cell site:1. Stores the current operational state of the first requested RCU2. Performs the specified measurements using the RTU3. Reports measurements to the user4. Unconditionally restores the RCU to its original operational state.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 13-7Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesTransmit and Receive Audio Level MeasurementsThe MEAS command performs transmit/receive audio level measurements and reports them to the user. The system Clock and Tone (CAT) board provides the specified tone and measures the audio level unless the EXT option is specified. The cell reports the audio levels as measured by the CAT board.The user can specify one of the following tones:■404 Hz at -16 dBm■1004 Hz at -16 dBm■1004 Hz at 0 dBm■2804 Hz at -16 dBm.The feature also supports a range of RCUs to perform the measurements. The feature sequentially repeats the following process for each requested RCU. The cell site will:■Store the current operational state of the first requested RCU■Perform the specified measurements using the RTU and CAT■Report measurements to the user■ Unconditionally restore the RCU to its original operational state.When the EXT option is specified, an external audio signal (for example, mobile audio) can be injected or an external audio analyzer can be used to detect the audio levels.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page13-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesSupervisory Audio and Signaling Tone DetectionThe MEAS command is used for the detection of the Supervisory Audio Tone (SAT) and the Signaling Tone (ST). If the EXT option is specified, an external test signal has to be injected in the Voice-RCU receive path. Otherwise, the RTU generates the test RF signal with the specified SAT and/or ST. The cell reports for each SAT whether it was detected or not (reports no SAT, multiple SAT, or incorrect SAT).As previously stated, measurements can be performed for a range of RCUs.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 13-9Enhanced Maintenance FeaturesRemote Data Link ReconfigurationBeginning with Release 4.3 there are two ways to update data link parameters: by Factory Installation Test System (FITS) and by cell data links (that is, from the MSC). While changing data link parameters from the MSC, the cell remains in service. However, at least one Core Processor Unit (CPU) must have the correct current data link options to keep the cell site in service. The new data link parameters are downloaded to the inactive (mate) CPU. A Radio Control Complex (that is, Cell Site Controller) side switch is then made, and the parameters are copied from the new active, updated CPU to the new mate CPU.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page13-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-114Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionContents■Contents 14-1Status Display Pages 14-2ECP Craft Shell 14-2Maintenance Request Administrator 14-3■Maintenance Units 14-4AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types 14-6TDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types 14-7CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality Types 14-9■ Maintenance States 14-12Maintenance states 14-12Active 14-12Standby 14-12Unequipped 14-12Out-Of-Service 14-12Growth State 14-12
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionMaintenance ToolsThis section explains the status reporting, diagnostic, and maintenance tools and procedures required to keep a cell site operating smoothly and to recover from any malfunction or other trouble that might occur that would damage the efficient operation of the cell site.During routine operation of the cell site, if any malfunction or other trouble occurs and no automatic recovery action is taken, or automatic recovery action fails, then the technician must intercede and perform the necessary diagnostic and recovery procedures. Three of the interfaces that will help the technician maintain and restore the system are briefly discussed first, followed by specific procedures for particular cell site problems.Status Display Pages Status display pages are the principle interface between the technician/operator and the Series II cellular system. They allow the technician to view system status, generate status reports, enter commands, and receive system responses.Status display pages are graphical displays that represent the hardware and software subsystems of the cell site and also display a nearly real-time status of all the cell sites serving the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). Fault conditions received by the ECP for any of the cell sites on the network are indicated at the top of the status display page via colors and flashing indicators. The technician may then bring up a visual display of the particular cell site that issued the fault condition. Status display pages allow the ECP technician do the following: ■Check the status of cell site hardware units■Generate output reports on cell site hardware units■Remove (deactivate■ Restore (activate)■Switch cell site hardware units; — Inhibit— Allow —Run diagnostics on cell site hardware units. The commands entered using the status display page are entered at the command line at the bottom of the status display page.ECP Craft Shell The ECP Craft Shell is another one of several software interfaces between the technician and the ECP. The same commands that are entered via status display pages may also be entered at the ECP Craft Shell. This section will describe
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-3Corrective Maintenance - Introductioncustomized commands that can be entered at either the ECP Craft Shell or at the command line at the bottom of a status display page.This section describes entering customized commands at the ECP Craft Shell prompt or at the command line at the bottom of a status display page. Maintenance Request AdministratorMaintenance activities for the cell site's primary and growth radio channel frames (RCFs) are done through a series of software subsystems that reside in the radio control complex (RCC). One such software subsystem is the maintenance request administrator (MRA), which provides maintenance personnel with control, routing, and diagnostic maintenance procedures.MRA receives maintenance requests from the ECP, performs the maintenance activities associated with the requests, and returns the results and collected data (if any) to the ECP. MRA handles requests to return information about the cell site, to remove (deactivate) cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site equipment, to perform diagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on. The MRA subsystem not only responds to external requests from the ECP, but also responds to internal requests submitted by other software subsystems, such as those performing automatic fault recovery or scheduled maintenance.The rest of this section describes the Cell Site units that require maintenance, the types of maintenance states that exist, and the maintenance actions that can be taken.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionMaintenance UnitsHardware elements in the primary and growth RCFs are identified in Table 14-1. The NULL, c (for conditional), u (for unconditional), yes, and no entries under the maintenance actions in the Maintenance Actions table indicate the possible maintenance actions for a give hardware element.Table 14-1 does not list the Maintenance units where obtaining status is the only maintenance action possible. The units not mentioned are the LAC, RCG, RFG, RFTG, GPS, and OTU/LMT (microcell only).A Series II Cell Site can have either an RFG or an RFTG, but not both. If the Cell Site has no CDMA radios, the RFG is installed; if the Cell Site has at least one CDMA radio, the RFTG is installed. An individual oscillator plug-in unit in the RFG or RFTG is denoted as RG (for reference generator) in the status display pages.A BCR and its associated BIU and ACU form a CDMA radio set—the BBA (for BCR-BIU-ACU). For OA&M purposes, the BBA is treated as a single maintenance unit.NOTE:Unlike the AMPS or TDMA radio hardware, the CDMA radio hardware consists of an entire shelf of plug-in units. Table 14-1. Cell Site Maintenance Units and Actions (Sheet 1 of 2)Unit SubunitMaintenance ActionRemove Restore Diagnose Stop aDiagnosticSwitch to Redundant Unit ObtainStatusRCC*NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesRCC CPU no no yes yes no noRCC MEM no no yes yes no noRCC NCI no no yes yes no noRCC CPI no no yes yes no noRCC AFI no no yes yes no noCAT NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesDS1 NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesDFI NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesDL NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesS-RCU†NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yes
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-5Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionV-RCU‡NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesL-RCU** NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesS-SBRCU†NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesV-SBRCU‡NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesL-SBRCU** NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesRTU NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesD-DRU†† NULL u u yes yes no yesV-DRU‡NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesB-DRU‡‡ NULL u u yes yes no yesL-DRU** NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesD-EDRU†† NULL u u yes yes no yesV-EDRU‡NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesB-EDRU‡‡ NULL u u yes yes no yesTRTU NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesSCT NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesCCC NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesCCU NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yesCCU CE no no no no no noBBA NULL c,u c,u yes yes yes yesCRTU NULL c,u c,u yes yes no yes*The RCC is denoted as CSC (for Cell Site controller) in the status display pages.†The S-RCU and S-SBRCU are denoted as SU (for setup radio) in the status display pages.‡ The V-RCU, V-SBRCU, V-DRU, and V-EDRU are denoted as RA (for voice radio) in the status display pages.** The L-RCU, L-SBRCU, and L-DRU are denoted as LC (for location radio) in the status display pages.†† The D-DRU and D-EDRU are denoted as DCCH (for digital control channel radio) in the status display pages.‡‡ A V-RCU or V-SBRCU may also be configured as a beacon radio, which is denoted as BC (for beacon radio) in the status display pages. A beacon radio transmits at a fixed power level and is instrumental in the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff procedure.Table 14-1. Cell Site Maintenance Units and Actions (Contd) (Sheet 2 of 2)Unit SubunitMaintenance ActionRemove Restore Diagnose Stop aDiagnosticSwitch to Redundant Unit ObtainStatus
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionAMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesFor the RCU radio type, there is one non-volatile memory (NVM) image file for the setup radio (S-RCU), analog voice radio (V-RCU), and analog locate radio(L-RCU). At initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other specific parameter values to each RCU. There is another NVM image file for the RTU.For the SBRCU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the S-SBRCU,V-SBRCU, and L-SBRCU. As of ECP Release 8.0, the Cell Site software downloads a new NVM image file to the SBRCU, separate and distinct from the NVM image file downloaded to the RCU.Prior to ECP Release 8.0, the Cell Site downloaded the same NVM image file to both the RCU and SBRCU radio types.The following list provides a brief description of each AMPS radio personality type (Refer to Figure 14-1):■Setup radio: Performs the analog setup function—establishes calls via the analog control channel (ACC) with mobile subscribers using AMPS orIS-54B compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles.■Analog voice radio: Performs the analog voice function—carries one over-the-air AMPS call.■Analog locate radio: Performs the analog locate function—assists with handoffs when the established AMPS call can be better served by an adjacent sector or cell by measuring the signal strength and verifying the supervisory audio tone (SAT) of the mobile targeted for handoff.An RCU or SBRCU having a voice radio personality may also have a beacon radio personality. Thus, an RCU or SBRCU can serve two functions concurrently: (1) carry an over-the-air AMPS call and (2) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA mobile-assisted handoff (MAHO) procedure. Because the RF carrier power level remains fixed for beacon radios, the dual-personality RCU or SBRCU is ineligible for dynamic power control.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-7Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionFigure 14-1. AMPS Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypeTDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesFor the DRU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the digital control channel radio (D-DRU), digital voice radio (V-DRU), and digital beacon radio (B-DRU). At initialization, the RCC downloads the personality type and other specific parameter values to each DRU. There is another NVM image file for the digital locate radio (L-DRU), and still another for the TRTU.For the EDRU radio type, there is one NVM image file for the D-EDRU, V-EDRU, and B-EDRU.A DRU or EDRU provides a basic modulation efficiency of three user channels per 30-kHz of bandwidth. The three user channels are designated user channel 1, user channel 2, and user channel 3. Each user channel is assigned one trunk (DS0) on the T1 line and one duplex timeslot on the RCF internal TDM bus.NOTE: TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."The following list is a brief description of each TDMA radio personality type (Refer to Figure 14-2):■Digital voice radio: Performs the digital traffic channel function—carries up to three over-the-air TDMA calls.TECHNOLOGYTYPE:HARDWARETYPE:PERSONALITYTYPE:S-SBRCU V-SBRCU L-SBRCU RTUAMPSS-RCU V-RCU L-RCUSBRCU RTURCUNVM IMAGE NVM IMAGE NVMIMAGE
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance - Introduction■Digital control channel (DCCH) radio: Performs the digital setup and short message service functions—establishes calls via the DCCH with mobile subscribers using IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles. The DCCH is carried on user channel 1. Typically, there is one DCCH per physical antenna face, or sector, in a TDMA system.■Digital beacon radio: Performs the digital beacon channel function—transmits at a fixed level at all times to provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure. Typically, there is one beacon radio per physical antenna face in a TDMA system.■Digital locate radio: Performs the digital locate channel function—assists with handoffs when the established TDMA call can be better served by an adjacent sector or cell by measuring the signal strength and verifying the digital verification color code (DVCC) of the IS-54B or IS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile targeted for handoff. The digital locate radio is instrumental in the DVCC verification procedure.A D-DRU or D-EDRU may also carry digital traffic and beacon channels. Thus, a D-DRU or D-EDRU can serve three functions concurrently: (1) perform the digital setup function—establish calls via the DCCH with mobile subscribers usingIS-136 compliant TDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles, (2) carry one or two over-the-air TDMA calls, and (3) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure. Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for DCCH radios, the D-DRU or D-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control.The EDRU, unlike the DRU, will be able to carry more than one DCCH. That is, in a future release, an EDRU will be able carry one, two, or three DCCHs.A B-DRU or B-EDRU may also carry digital traffic channels. Thus, a B-DRU orB-EDRU can serve two functions concurrently: (1) provide signal strength measurements for the TDMA MAHO procedure and (2) carry one, two, or even three over-the-air TDMA calls. (A digital beacon channel may double as a digital traffic channel.) Since the RF carrier power level remains fixed for beacon radios, the B-DRU or B-EDRU is ineligible for dynamic power control.A V-DRU or V-EDRU may only carry digital traffic channels. A V-DRU or V-EDRU can carry one, two, or three digital traffic channels.An L-DRU may only carry digital locate channels. An L-DRU can carry one, two, or three digital locate channels.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-9Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionFigure 14-2. TDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesCDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesFor each CDMA cluster (one CCC managing up to seven CCUs), there is one NVM image file for each of the following elements:■the CCC■the pilot/sync/access (P/S/A) CE personality■the page CE personality■the traffic CE personality■the orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS) CE personality. At initialization, the CCC downloads the personality-type image files and other specific parameter values into active memory of the CCUs—the CCC downloads exactly one personality-type image file to each CCU CE. There is another NVM image file for the BBA, another for the CRTUi, and still another for the SCT. The CCU contains two on-board CEs. Thus, a CCC can manage up to 14 CEs.For the cellular band class (850 MHz), the TIA IS-95A standard defines two common carriers: the primary CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel 283 for System A (A band) and 384 for System B (B band), and the secondary CDMA carrier, which is centered on RF channel 691 for System A (A’ band) and 777 for System B (B’ band). Each CDMA omni cell or cell sector must be assigned at least one common carrier. For the PCS band class (1900 MHz), candidates for common CDMA carriers range from channel numbers 25 to 1175 in increments of 25.TECHNOLOGYTYPE:HARDWARETYPE:PERSONALITYTYPE:TDMAEDRUTRTUDRUD-DRU V-DRU L-DRU TRTUB-DRU D-EDRU V-EDRU L-EDRUB-EDRU E-TRTU(FUTURE)NVM IMAGENVM NVM IMAGE NVMIMAGE IMAGE(FUTURE)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionEach common CDMA carrier (primary, secondary) on an antenna face has one CE configured as the P/S/A CE and another configured as the page CE. The two CEs may be on the same CCU or on different CCUs within the same CDMA cluster.The following list provides a brief description of each CDMA CE personality type (Refer to Figure 14-3):■Pilot/Sync/Access CE: Performs part of the CDMA call setup function—establishes calls with mobile subscribers using IS-95A or IS-95B compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobiles.The pilot channel is an unmodulated, direct-sequence spread-spectrum signal transmitted continuously by each sector of a CDMA cell. It allows the mobile to acquire the timing of the forward control channels and provides a coherent carrier phase reference for demodulating the sync and paging channels.The sync channel provides time-of-day and frame synchronization to the mobile. The mobile uses this channel to acquire cell and sector-specific information.The access channel is a CDMA reverse channel used for short signaling message exchange such as mobile registration, mobile call origination, and response to pages. The access channel is a slotted random access channel used by mobiles to communicate to the Cell Site.■Page CE: Performs part of the CDMA call setup function—transmits control information to idle mobiles during mobile powerup and when a mobile is acquiring a new Cell Site. It conveys pages to the mobiles.■Traffic CE: Performs the CDMA traffic channel function—carries one over-the-air CDMA call. A traffic channel, which is a communication path between a mobile station and a Cell Site, carries user and signaling information. The term traffic channel implies a forward and reverse pair.■OCNS CE: Simulates a specified number of mobile users operating in a specified sector on a specified carrier. OCNS allows generation of a simulated user load on the CDMA forward channels in order to assist in verifying the capacity of the CDMA system.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-11Corrective Maintenance - IntroductionFigure 14-3. CDMA Radio Maintenance Units and Personality TypesTECHNOLOGYTYPE:HARDWARETYPE:PERSONALITYTYPE:CDMAACU*CCUCCCP/S/A CE PAGE CE OCNS CETRAFFIC CESCTBCR* BIU* CRTUiNVMIMAGE NVMIMAGE NVMIMAGE NVMIMAGECE CENVMIMAGE NVMIMAGE NVMIMAGENVMIMAGE* BCR-BIU-ACU = BBA
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-12 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance - Introduction Maintenance StatesDuring installation, each unit is assigned an equipment state of unequipped, growth, or equipped via translations (system configuration parameter settings). Each equipped unit is further assigned a state of active, out-of-service, or standby (redundant unit only) via maintenance requests sent to the MRA subsystem.Maintenance states The meanings of the maintenance states are as follows: ActiveUnit is available for its intended use; for example, an RCU can service a call, the RTU can be used to test analog radio equipment, etc.StandbyUnit is available to be placed into the active state; applies only to redundant units RCC, CAT, SCT, BBA, and setup radio (S-RCU, S-SBRCU).(Because the BBA is a single point failure for a sector, redundant BBAs—one active and the other in standby mode—may be installed for increased reliability. Currently, redundant BBAs may only be installed in the non-subcell configuration.)(Setup radios are considered redundant when there are spare setup radios at the Cell Site. For Cell Sites having the automatic radio reconfiguration—ARR—feature active for setup radios, there are no spare setup radios at the Cell Site: in that case, setup radios are not redundant.)UnequippedUnit exists in the translations data base strictly as a place holder. MRA will reject any maintenance request targeted for an unequipped unit.Out-Of-ServiceUnit is not available for its intended use (exact opposite of active state), but is available to be diagnosed or updated with NVM.Growth StateUnit is not available to be placed in use, but is available to be diagnosed or updated with NVM.Throughout the maintenance process, MRA records locally the maintenance status of the Cell Site equipment in the equipment status table. The maintenance status of equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECP
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 14-13Corrective Maintenance - Introductionrequests an update. The status of Cell Site equipment appears in the status display pages.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page14-14 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-115Corrective Maintenance using MRAContents■Contents 15-1■Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) 15-2■Diagnose 15-3Related Documents 15-4Stop a Diagnostic 15-4Obtain Status 15-4Related Documents 15-4Qualifiers Associated with the Out-Of-Service (OOS) State 15-4■Dual Server Group Out-Of-Service (OOS) Limits 15-6New RC/V Translation Parameters 15-6■Remove/Restore/Switch Actions 15-7Conditional Remove 15-7Unconditional Remove 15-11Conditional and Unconditional Restore 15-13Related Documents 15-16Switch to a Redundant Unit 15-16Related Documents 15-17
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-2 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAMaintenance Request Administrator (MRA)Maintenance activities for the cell site’s primary and growth radio channel frames (RCFs) are done through a series of software subsystems that reside in the radio control complex (RCC). One such software subsystem is the maintenance request administrator (MRA), which provides maintenance personnel with control, routing, and diagnostic maintenance procedures. MRA receives maintenance requests from the ECP, performs the maintenance activities associated with the requests, and returns the results and collected data (if any) to the ECP. MRA handles requests to return information about the cell site, to remove (deactivate) cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site equipment, to perform diagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on. The MRA subsystem not only responds to external requests from the ECP, but also responds to internal requests submitted by other software subsystems, such those performing automatic fault recovery or scheduled maintenance. The rest of this section describes the Cell Site units that require maintenance, the types of maintenance states that exist, and the maintenance actions that can be taken.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-3Corrective Maintenance using MRADiagnoseThe diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a unit in the out-of-service or growth state, to a redundant unit in the standby state, or to a redundant unit in the active state. In the latter case, MRA initiates a switch before executing the diagnose request. NOTE:For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the active state but the mate is out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with no action taken. In addition, if the targeted unit is an active SCT, the diagnose aborts with no action taken even if the SCT has a standby mate. In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC, CCU, or CRTU in the active state. The first step in a diagnose maintenance action for an active CCC, CCU, or CRTU is the automatic execution of a conditional remove. Whether a unit passes or fails diagnostics, the unit is left in the out-of-service state except for a unit in the growth state. A unit initially in the growth state remains in the growth state. The diagnostic test results (pass, fail) are reported to the ECP. A diagnostic test can be called for the whole RCC (in which all controller circuit boards are tested), or a diagnostic test can be called for an individual controller circuit board (for example, CPU). For diagnose requests pertaining to radios involved in ARR, you need to be aware of the following conditions: ■A diagnose request without the qualifier orig is applied to the replacement radio; the rules governing the behavior of the diagnose command remain in effect dur-ing an ARR condition. A diagnose request of a setup, DCCH, beacon, or analog locate radio involved in an ARR condition is rejected because diagnosing an active unit is not permitted. To diagnose a replacement radio, first unconditionally remove the radio, then diagnose the radio. Whether the replacement radio passes or fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the out-of-service state and the ARR condition remains in effect. ■A diagnose request with the qualifier orig is applied to the original radio; whether the original radio passes or fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the out-of-service state and the ARR condition remains in effect. ■A diagnose request applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed by the ARR fea-ture and is not available.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-4 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRARelated Documents For more information on the diagnose maintenance action, refer to the DGN CELL, DGN CELL DL, and DGN CELL SG commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610- 055). Stop a Diagnostic The stop maintenance action stops a diagnostic test on a maintenance unit. If the diagnostic test request is still in the job queue, MRA removes the request from the queue. If the diagnostic test is running, MRA aborts the test. MRA leaves the unit in the out-of-service or growth state unless the unit is a CCC, CCU, BBA, or CRTU. Upon terminating a diagnostic test for one of those units, MRA returns the unit to the state it was in just prior to the diagnostic request (out-of-service, growth, or active) unless the diagnostic test is already running on the unit, in which case the unit is left in the out-of-service state. For more information on the stop a diagnostic maintenance action, refer to the STOP DGN CELL, STOP DGN CELL DL, and STOP DGN CELL SG commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055). Obtain Status The obtain status maintenance action determines the status (state) of a maintenance unit, that is, MRA reads the recorded status from the equipment status table and forwards the status to the ECP. In addition, MRA automatically reports the maintenance status of equipment to the ECP whenever the status changes. A status display page is refreshed with new maintenance status every 15 seconds. Related Documents For more information on the obtain status maintenance action, refer to the OP CELL, OP CELL DL, OP CELL DLOPTS, OP CELL EXTERN, OP CELL GENERIC, OP CELL OVLD, OP CELL SCSM, OP CELL SG, and OP CELL VERSION commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055). Qualifiers Associated with the Out-Of-Service (OOS) StateA maintenance unit can be placed in the out-of-service state due to one of several reasons. To identify the reason that a unit is in the out-of-service state, MRA assigns the unit a qualifier in addition to its final state of OOS. MRA assigns a qualifier to a unit during execution of the maintenance request (See Table 15-1). Both the qualifier and final state of the unit are reported to the ECP. Table 15-1. OOS State Quilifiers Qualifier DescriptionOOS-DGN The unit is in the out-of-service state due to the successful completion of a diagnose request.OOS-FAULT The unit is in the out-of-service state due to fault detection during diag-nostics in the Cell Site.OOS-INITF The unit is in the out-of-service state due to an unsuccessful initial-iza-tion process.OOS-NVMUPT The unit is in the out-of-service state because its NVM is being updated.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-5Corrective Maintenance using MRAOOS-RMVD The unit is in the out-of-service state due to the successful completion of a remove request.OOS-TBLANL This qualifier is used for leaving a unit in OOS state after it has suc-cess-fully passed diagnostics but is still reporting faults. This state is known as the trouble-analysis state.OOS-CDMAF The CCC, CCU, or BBA is in the out-of-service state due to no CDMA timing.OOS-CFR The BBA is in the out-of-service state due to its involvement in a multi-ple configure (MULTI CFR) test. OOS-DNP The previously active CCU is in the out-of-service state due to the removal of two consecutive downstream CCUs. OOS-POS The previously active CCU is in the out-of-service state due to the suc-cessful completion of a remove request of the parent CCC. OOS-RMVIP The DS1 is currently being removed.Table 15-1. OOS State Quilifiers (Contd)Qualifier Description
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-6 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRADual Server Group Out-Of-Service (OOS) LimitsFor a Series II Dual Server Group cell, configured as either a 3-sector or 6-sector cell, Voice Radio Out-Of-Service (OOS) limits can now be set on a per Logical Antenna Face (LAF) level, rather than on a per-cell level. Previously, OSS limits functioned as follows: The OOS limits could only be defined, or set, on a per-cell basis. However, the software that performed OOS checking for conditional OA&M commands, checked on a per LAF basis. Therefore, it was possible for per- cell OSS limits to block the testing of radios on a particular LAF. This is no longer a problem. The ability to set OOS limits on a per LAF basis allows the service-provider to set the voice radio OSS limits at the same level at which the Cell Site software performs the OOS checking for conditional OA&M commands; that is, at the per LAF level. New RC/V Translation ParametersThis feature adds 4 new AMPS and TDMA Voice Radio OOS limit translations to the ceqface form, as below: 1. AMPS Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 0. This parameter defines the AMPS Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group 0. 2. AMPS Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 1. This parameter defines the AMPS Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group 1. 3. TDMA Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 0. This parameter defines the TDMA Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group 0. 4. TDMA Voice Radio OOS Limit Server Group 1 This parameter defines the TDMA Voice Radio Out of Service Limit for Server Group. For all 4 translations, the following apply: ■The view is Per Logical Face. ■The Allowable Values are 1 to 100% or Blank. ■The Default is Blank. ■The Restriction is that, if no value is entered (i.e., Blank), the value defaults to the Per Cell Voice. ■Radio Out of Service Limit. ■Update is allowable.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-7Corrective Maintenance using MRARemove/Restore/Switch ActionsMaintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units through commands from the ECP or by Cell Site software processes. The yes and no entries under the maintenance actions in shown in the figures at the beack of this chapter indicate whether a maintenance action is permitted for a maintenance unit. In the rows of the table that have NULL in the Subunit column, the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Unit column; in the rows of the table that do not have NULL in the Subunit column, the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Subunit column. The c and u entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicate whether a remove or restore maintenance action is conditional or unconditional. In general, a conditional maintenance request will not result in any action that causes calls to be dropped or service denied to a user during the course of command execution; if executing a conditional request would violate either condition, MRA would reject the request. In contrast, an unconditional maintenance request will result in the execution of the request immediately or within five minutes of MRA accepting the request, with little concern to whether calls are dropped or service denied to a user during the course of command execution. If a unit is involved in an automatic radio configuration (ARR) when a maintenance action is applied, the maintenance action is applied to the replacement radio unless orig is specified in the maintenance request, in which case the maintenance action is applied to the original radio. Any maintenance action applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) will be rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. The ARR feature applies to AMPS and TDMA but not to CDMA. All maintenance actions (remove, restore, diagnose, stop a diagnostic, switch to redundant unit, and obtain status) are reported to the ECP. Once a maintenance action has started on a maintenance unit, MRA will reject any subsequent maintenance-action request for that unit until the current action has completed with the following exception: for any given unit, an unconditional maintenance-action request can terminate a conditional maintenance-action request. Conditional Remove The conditional remove maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service. It schedules an event or process to place the specified maintenance unit to out-of-service assuming that it is idle_NOT busy. An idle unit is in the active state but not currently performing its intended purpose; a busy unit is in the active state and currently performing its intended purpose, such as a V-RCU supporting an active call.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-8 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAIf the unit is a busy V-RCU, V-SBRCU, V-DRU, V-EDRU, CCC, or CCU when the conditional remove action is applied, the unit is blocked (not allowed to accept new calls), and the remove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as the unit becomes idle (free of all calls) during the five-minute interval, it is removed from service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, the conditional remove aborts with no action taken. If the unit is a CCC carrying overhead channels, MRA will attempt to migrate the overhead channels to CEs on the other-side CDMA cluster on the same shelf_select two idle traffic CEs on the other-side CDMA cluster on the same shelf and reconfigure them as the overhead channels. The overhead channel CEs for a common CDMA carrier on an omni cell or cell sector must be on the same CDMA cluster, that is, must be controlled by the same CCC. If the unit is a CCU carrying an overhead channel, MRA will attempt to migrate the overhead channel to another CE on the same CDMA cluster_select an idle traffic CE on the same CDMA cluster and reconfigure it as the overhead channel. If that attempt fails, MRA will attempt to migrate the overhead channel to an idle traffic CE on the other-side CDMA cluster on the same shelf. If the migration is successful, MRA will initiate a CDMA overhead channel functional test to verify the operation of the newly assigned overhead channels (or channel). For redundant units, if the unit is in the standby state when the conditional remove action is applied, the unit is removed from service immediately. If the unit is in the active state and the mate in the standby state when the conditional remove action is applied, MRA automatically executes a switch before removing the unit from service. And finally, if the unit is in the active state and the mate in the out-of-service state when the conditional remove action is applied, the conditional remove aborts with no action taken. ( Exception: if the BBA out-of-service threshold limit is set to 100%, the remove request will continue.) Currently, redundant BBA operation is supported in the non-subcell configuration but not the subcell configuration. Only simplex BBA operation_one BBA per CDMA shelf_ is supported in the subcell configuration. Other conditions that will cause the conditional remove to abort with no action taken are described as follows: ■A conditional remove action on a unit in the growth state is not permitted unless the unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. A conditional remove action of a CCC, CCU, or BBA in the growth state simply resets the unit; the unit remains in the growth state. ■If placing the unit out-of-service would result in exceeding the out-of-service threshold limit for that type of unit, the conditional remove action is not permitted.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-9Corrective Maintenance using MRAA 100% out-of-service threshold limit for a particular type of unit means that any number (one to all) of those units may be conditionally removed. A 0% out-of-service threshold limit for a particular type of unit means that not even one of those units may be conditionally removed. Out-of-service threshold limits for analog voice radios, analog locate radios, digital voice radios, and digital locate radios are translatable, that is, specified using the recent change/verify (RC/V) subsystem at the ECP (specifically, using RC/V form cell2). Out-of-service threshold limits for setup radios, DCCH radios, and beacon radios are not translatable. Effectively, the out-of-service limit for each of these radio types is 0%, meaning that removing just one such radio would exceed the radio out-of-service threshold limit. Out-of-service threshold limits for CDMA traffic CEs and BBAs are translatable on a per antenna face (sector and carrier) basis using the RC/V form cell2. The range is 25% to 100%; the default is 25%. Blocked traffic CEs are included in the out-of-service threshold limit calculations. Overhead CEs (pilot/sync/ access and page) are not included in the out-of-service threshold limit calculations. (In a CDMA subcell configuration, MRA adds the individual antenna face out-of-service threshold limits together to obtain a total out-of-service threshold limit for the whole subcell. For example, if the face out-of-service threshold limit is 25% and each shelf is equipped with 26 traffic channels, the individual face out-of-service threshold limit is six traffic channels. If all three faces are served by all three shelves_a 3-shelf subcell configuration, the total out-of-service threshold limit for the whole subcell is 18 traffic channels, meaning that MRA would check for an out-of-service threshold limit of 18 traffic channels for the whole subcell. In this example, MRA would only allow a single CDMA cluster to be conditionally removed.) (The removal of any two adjacent CCUs will break the transmit bus path, thereby disrupting the transmit data upstream from the break. As an example, removing CCUs 2 and 3 will also remove CCUs 4 through 7. For a conditional remove request, MRA will not permit the removal of two adjacent CCUs if the removal would result in exceeding the traffic CE out-of-service threshold limit.) ■A conditional remove action on a DS1 or DFI is not permitted if the out-of-service limit would be exceeded for voice radios. ■A conditional remove action on a DS1 or DFI is not permitted if that unit controls the last data link to a Cell Site. ■A conditional remove action on the last data link to a Cell Site is not permitted. (Only an unconditional remove action on the last data link can remove the data link from service.)
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-10 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRA■A conditional remove action on an RTU, TRTU, or CRTU involved in diagnostics of another unit_such as during a setup radio, DCCH radio, or CDMA radio functional test_is not permitted. (This restriction avoids false errors that may be generated upon premature termination of the diagnostic test involving the RTU, TRTU, or CRTU.) ■A conditional remove action on a CAT or SCT involved in diagnostics of another unit_that is, CAT or SCT supplying a digital tone source_is not permitted. (This restriction avoids false errors that may be generated upon premature termination of the diagnostic test involving the CAT or SCT.) ■Neither a conditional nor unconditional remove action is permitted on the last CAT or SCT on a TDM bus (TDM0 or TDM1). Note: TDM buses are always installed "red stripe up."■Neither a conditional nor unconditional remove action is permitted on SCT 4 if SCT 5 is already out-of-service, on SCT 5 if SCT 4 is already out-of-service. ■A conditional remove action on an active SCT_even though its mate may be in standby_is not permitted. (In general, any conditional maintenance request that would normally cause redundant units to switch is not permitted for SCTs. The switching of SCTs could leave the associated CDMA hardware_the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing from the redundant SCTs_in an unknown state, which would require the manual restore of the affected CCCs.) ■A conditional remove action on a setup radio having no associated spare is not permitted. (Only an unconditional remove action on a setup radio having no associated spare_other than a hard fault_can remove the radio from service.) ■A conditional remove action on a DCCH radio is not permitted. (Only an uncondi-tional remove action on a DCCH radio_other than a hard fault_can remove the radio from service.) ■A conditional remove action on a beacon radio is not permitted. (Only an uncon-ditional remove action on a beacon radio_other than a hard fault_can remove the radio from service.) (By definition, a beacon radio may be a B-DRU or a B-EDRU, or a V-RCU or V-SBRCU configured as a beacon radio. Be aware, though, that because setup and DCCH radios have their transmitters On all the time and transmit at fixed power levels, they too may serve as beacon-like radios.) ■For radios involved in ARR:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-11Corrective Maintenance using MRA—A conditional remove request without the qualifier orig is applied to the replacement radio; the rules governing the behavior of the conditional remove command for each type of radio (setup, DCCH, beacon, analog locate) remain in effect during an ARR condition. A conditional remove request of a setup, DCCH, or beacon radio involved in an ARR condition is not permitted. A conditional remove request of an analog locate radio involved in an ARR condition is permitted as long as such an action would not violate out-of-service limits for analog locate radios. —A conditional remove request with the qualifier orig is applied to the origi-nal radio; the request is rejected because the orig qualifier is not sup-ported for the RMV CELL (remove cell) command. —A conditional remove request applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available.For more information on the remove maintenance action, refer to the RMV CELL and RMV CELL SG commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055). Unconditional Remove Unconditional remove requests may be service affecting because of the out-of-service limits that may be exceeded. For example, service to a Cell Site is affected if the last setup radio is removed. The unconditional remove maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service. It promptly places the specified maintenance unit in the out-of-service state unless any of the following conditions are in effect: ■The unconditional remove action is targeted for a busy V-RCU, V-SBRCU, V-DRU, V-EDRU, CCC, CCU, or a BBA having no mate or the mate is out-of-ser-vice. The remove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as the unit becomes idle during the five-minute interval, MRA removes the unit from service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, MRA drops the calls and removes the unit from service. Be aware that the removal of any two adjacent CCUs will break the transmit bus path, thereby disrupting the transmit data upstream from the break. As an example, removing CCUs 2 and 3 will also remove CCUs 4 through 7. For an unconditional remove request, MRA will allow the removal of two adjacent CCUs with no regard for the traffic CE out-of-service threshold limit. ■The unconditional remove action is targeted for a DS1 or DFI that, if removed, would result in the exceeding of the out-of-service limit for voice radios. The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-12 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRA■The unconditional remove action is targeted for a unit in the growth state. The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken unless the unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. An unconditional remove action of a CCC, CCU, or BBA in the growth state simply resets the unit; the unit remains in the growth state. ■The unconditional remove action is targeted for a redundant RCC, CAT, or SCT having an out-of-service mate. The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken. An unconditional remove action targeted for a redundant setup radio having an out-of-service mate will be honored immediately by MRA. After the removal, both the setup radio and its mate will be out-of-service. Be aware that an unconditional remove request of an active SCT having a standby mate will result in a SCT switch, which could leave the associated CDMA hardware_ the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing from the redundant SCTs_in an unknown state. You would have to manually restore the affected CCCs. If an RTU, TRTU, or CRTU is involved in diagnostics of another unit, an unconditional remove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics, which may result in the generation of false errors upon premature termination of the diagnostic test. Similarly, if a CAT or SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit, an unconditional remove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics, which may result in the generation of false errors upon premature termination of the diagnostic test. Other conditions pertaining to unconditional remove requests that you need to be aware of are as follows: ■If the requested unit is a setup radio having no associated spare, the radio will be removed without invoking ARR. A warning message appears stating that the radio removed was a setup radio. ■If the requested unit is a DCCH radio, the radio will be removed without invoking ARR, even if it is the last DCCH for the sector. A warning message appears stat-ing that the radio removed was a DCCH radio. ■If the requested unit is a beacon radio, the radio will be removed without invoking ARR. A warning message appears stating that the radio removed was a beacon radio. ■For radios involved in ARR:
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-13Corrective Maintenance using MRA—An unconditional remove request without the qualifier orig is applied to the replacement radio; when the radio is removed, MRA remembers the ARR condition; when the radio is restored, MRA continues the ARR_the ARR condition remains in effect. —An unconditional remove request with the qualifier orig is applied to the original radio; the request is rejected because the orig qualifier is not sup-ported for the RMV CELL (remove cell) command. —An unconditional remove request applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available. Conditional and Unconditional RestoreThe restore maintenance action can be applied to units that are in the out-of-service, active, or standby state. Except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state, the first step in a conditional restore maintenance action is the automatic execution of a conditional remove. Therefore, all the restrictions associated with a conditional remove are also associated with a conditional restore. Similarly, except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state, the first step in an unconditional restore maintenance action is the automatic execution of an unconditional remove. Therefore, the lack of restrictions associated with an unconditional remove_unconditional remove requests may be service affecting_are also associated with an unconditional restore. The conditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit to active. It schedules an event or process to restore the specified maintenance unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test. If the unit fails the diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. The failed unit remains in the out-of-service state. The unconditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit to active. It schedules an event or process to restore the specified maintenance unit without first running a diagnostic test on the unit. NOTE:For a redundant unit (RCC, CAT, SCT, BBA, or setup radio), you can specify the STBY parameter in the RST command line to restore the unit to the standby state. A conditional restore request on a unit in the growth state will diagnose and initialize the unit but will not change the state of the unit: the unit remains in the growth state. An unconditional restore of a unit in the growth state is not permitted unless the unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. An unconditional restore action of a CCC, CCU, or BBA in the growth state (1) initializes the CCC as an active CCC with call processing and error reporting inhibited, (2) configures all CEs on the CCU as
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-14 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAtraffic channels, or (3) initializes the BBA as a standby BBA; the unit remains in the growth state. Other conditions pertaining to conditional and unconditional restore requests that you need to be aware of are as follows: ■For data links (DLs): —A conditional restore request reverts to unconditional if there is no link currently in-service; no diagnostic test is run. —No action is performed if an unconditional restore request is made on the currently in-service link. ■For redundant units: —An RCC conditional restore request compares the active and mate mem-ories of the controller sides (RCC 0 and RCC 1) after the RCC being restored has elevated to the standby state. A mismatch in memory drops the RCC back to the out-of-service state and aborts the restore request. —An active RCC, CAT, or SCT having an out-of-service mate cannot be conditionally or unconditionally restored. —An active BBA having an out-of-service mate cannot be conditionally restored unless (1) the BBA out-of-service threshold limit is set to 100% and (2) the BBA becomes idle_free of calls_within five minutes of issu-ing the conditional restore command. An active BBA having an out-of-ser-vice mate can be unconditionally restored. —An active setup radio having an out-of-service mate cannot be condition-ally restored but can be unconditionally restored. —An active SCT having a standby mate cannot be conditionally restored but can be unconditionally restored. (In general, any conditional maintenance request that would normally cause redundant units to switch is not permitted for SCTs. The switching of SCTs could leave the associated CDMA hardware_the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing from the redundant SCTs_in an unknown state, which would require the manual restore of the affected CCCs.) —A standby SCT can be conditionally restored to the standby state but not the active state. In contrast, a standby SCT can be unconditionally restored to either the standby or active state. ■For setup radios: —A conditional restore action on an active setup radio having no associated spare is not permitted.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-15Corrective Maintenance using MRA—An unconditional restore action on an active setup radio having no associated spare is permitted. —If call processing is inhibited, setup radios are in the standby state. ■For both setup and analog locate radios: —If a radio that was conditionally restored becomes active, a functional test is immediately scheduled for the radio. ■For DCCH radios: —A conditional restore action on an active DCCH radio is not permitted. —An unconditional restore action on an active DCCH radio is permitted, even if it is the last DCCH for the sector. The unconditional restore action resets the DCCH (that is, resets the DRU or EDRU carrying the DCCH). ■For beacon radios: —A conditional restore action on an active beacon radio is not permitted. —An unconditional restore action on an active beacon is permitted. —A beacon radio’s transmitter is always turned back On as part of a radio restore request sequence. For radios involved in ARR: ■A conditional restore request without the qualifier orig is applied to the replace-ment radio; the rules governing the behavior of the conditional restore command for each type of radio (setup, DCCH, beacon, analog locate) remain in effect dur-ing an ARR condition. A conditional restore request of an active setup, DCCH, or beacon radio involved in an ARR condition is not permitted. A conditional restore request of an active analog locate radio involved in an ARR condition is permitted as long as such an action would not violate out-of-service limits for analog locate radios To conditionally restore a replacement radio, first unconditionally remove the radio, then conditionally restore the radio. If the replacement radio passes diag-nostics, the radio is restored to the active state. If the replacement radio fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the out-of-service state. Whether the replacement radio passes or fails diagnostics, the ARR condition remains in effect. ■A conditional restore request with the qualifier orig is applied to the original radio. If the original radio passes diagnostics, the radio is restored to service with its original personality and the replacement radio resumes its
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-16 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAformer personality_ the ARR condition is terminated (reversed). If the original radio fails diagnostics, the radio is left in the out-of-service state and the ARR condition remains in effect. ■A conditional restore request applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) is rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available. ■An unconditional restore request without the qualifier orig is applied to the replacement radio. If the restore action is successful, the replacement radio is restored to the active state. If the restore action fails, the replacement radio is left in the out-of-service state. Whether the restore action is successful or unsuc-cessful, the ARR condition remains in effect. ■An unconditional restore request with the qualifier orig is applied to the original radio. If the restore action is successful, the original radio is restored to the active state and the ARR condition is terminated (reversed). If the restore action fails, the original radio is left in the out-of-service state and the ARR condition remains in effect. ■An unconditional restore request applied directly to the replacement radio (say RA10) will be rejected because that functionality is unavailable due to the ARR. An output report message appears stating that the radio is being borrowed by the ARR feature and is not available. Related Documents For more information on the restore maintenance action, refer to the RST CELL and RST CELL SG commands in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055). Switch to a Redundant Unit The switch to redundant unit maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit from active to standby while at the same time changing the state of a second unit (the associated redundant unit) from standby to active. The purpose of the maintenance action is to transfer the functions of the first unit to the second unit. (This maintenance action applies only to the RCC, CAT, SCT, BBA, or setup radio). If either of the redundant units is in the out-of-service state, the switch request aborts with no action taken. For the CAT or SCT, the switch request will fail if the CAT/ SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit. (Does not apply to SCT units having logical CAT numbers 4 and 5.) !CAUTION:Be aware that a switch action on a SCT could leave the associated CDMA hard-ware_the CCCs and CCUs that are receiving CDMA timing from the redundant SCTs_in an unknown state. You would have to manually restore the affected CCCs.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-17Corrective Maintenance using MRARelated Documents For more information on the switch to redundant unit maintenance action, refer to the SW CELL command in the Input Messages manual (401-610-055). Figure 15-1. Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU (Sheet 1 of 3)Remove radio again and tag unit OOS-Is removerequest conditional orunconditional?Isradio beacon orDCCH?Is radioin growth state?Is radioin OOS state?Radio is in active state.1ToSheet 2NoYesNoYesDesignated location has no unit installed.CondUncondNoYesNoYesRemoval of unit in growth state is not Is radiounequipped?StartEndEndAbort. Return error-Return completion-code message to Cond remove of beacon or DCCH is not 2ToSheet 3
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-18 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-2. Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU (Sheet 1 of 3)Conditional remove of voice radio (continued)EndReturn completion-code message to technician.BusyIs radioidle or busy?Does radiobecome idle?If removed,is OOS thresholdexceeded?NoYesRemove radio (place unit out-of-service).Set radio’s state in equipment status table to OOS-RMVD.IdleNoYes1FromSheet 1For ECP R6.0 and Later: Attempt to handoff calls to another radio of the same technology in the same sector; poll periodically to see if radio is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5 minutes.MRA blocks radio’s trunk(s).*Abort. Return error-code message to technician.* Unblock radio’s trunk(s).
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-19Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-3. Remove Flow of Voice Radio RCU, SBRCU, DRU, or EDRU (Sheet 3 of 3)Unconditional remove of voice radio (continued)BusyIs radioidle or busy?Does radiobecome idle?NoYesRemove radio (place unit out-of-service).Set radio’s state in equipment status table to OOS-RMVD.IdleEnd2FromSheet 1Drop calls.Return completion-code message to technician.MRA blocks radio’s trunk(s).*For ECP R6.0 or later: Attempt to handoff calls to another radio of the same technology in the same sector; poll periodically to see if radio is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5 minutes.*
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-20 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-4. Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 1 of 3)If removed,is OOS thresholdexceeded?Remove CCC again and tag unit OOS-RMVD.Is CCCin growth state?Is CCCin OOS state?1ToSheet 2NoYe sNoYe s Designated location has no unit installed.NoYe sIs CCCunequipped?StartEndEndAbort. Return error-code message to technician.Return completion-code message to technician.CondUncond 2ToSheet 3NoYe sIs removerequest conditional orunconditional?CCC is in active state.Reset CCC; CCC remains in growth state.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-21Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-5. Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 2 of 3)Is CCCserving overheadchannels?Is migrationsuccessful?Conditional remove of CCC (continued)EndBusyIs CCCidle or busy?YesYes1FromSheet 1Abort. Return error-code message to technician.Does CCCbecome idle?Unblock associated CDMA cluster/ packet pipe.NoReturn completion-code message to technician.Remove CCC (place unit out-of-service).Poll periodically to see if CCC is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5 minutes.MRA blocks associated CDMA cluster/ packet pipe.*Attempt to migrate overhead channels to another CDMA cluster within subcell.Set CCC’s state in equipment status table to OOS-RMVD; set any active CCU under CCC to OOS-POS.IdleNo Yes*No
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-22 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-6. Remove Flow of CCC (Sheet 3 of 3)Is CCCserving overheadchannels?Unconditional remove of CCC (continued)EndBusyIs CCCidle or busy?Ye sIdleNoYe s2FromSheet 1MRA notifies ECP of any emergency call; currently, technician cannot abort remove request.Does CCCbecome idle?Drop calls.Is migrationsuccessful?No **YesIf migration fails, MRA sends warning to ECP.**Return completion-code message to technician.Remove CCC (place unit out-of-service).Poll periodically to see if CCC is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5minutes.MRA blocks associated CDMA cluster/ packet pipe.*Attempt to migrate overhead channels to another CDMA cluster within subcell.Set CCC’s state in equipment status table to OOS-RMVD; set any active CCU under CCC to OOS-POS.*No
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-23Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-7. Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 1 of 3)If removed,is OOS thresholdexceeded?Remove CCU again and tag unit OOS-RMVD.Is CCUin growth state?Is CCUin OOS state?1ToSheet 2NoYe sNoYe s Designated location has no unit installed.NoYe sIs CCUunequipped?StartEndEndAbort. Return error-code message to technician.Return completion-code message to technician.CondUncond 2ToSheet 3NoYe sIs removerequest conditional orunconditional?CCU is in active state.Reset CCU; CCU remains in growth state.
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-24 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-8. Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 2 of 3)Is migrationsuccessful?Conditional remove of CCU (continued)EndBusyIs CCUidle or busy?Is CCUserving overheadchannels?NoYesIdleNoYes1FromSheet 1Abort. Return error-code message to technician.Does CCUbecome idle?NoYesReturn completion-code message to technician.Remove CCU (place unit out-of-service).Set CCU’s state in equipment status table to OOS-RMVD.*Poll periodically to see if CCU is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5 minutes. Unblock CCU.Attempt to migrate overhead channels to another CCU within subcell.MRA blocks CCU from receiving calls.*
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-25Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-9. Remove Flow of CCU (Sheet 3 of 3)Is CCUserving overheadchannels?Unconditional remove of CCU (continued)EndBusyIs CCUidle or busy?NoYe sIdleNoYes2FromSheet 1Does CCUbecome idle?Drop calls.Is migrationsuccessful?No **YesReturn completion-code message to technician.Remove CCU (place unit out-of-service).Set CCU’s state in equipment status table to OOS-RMVD.*Poll periodically to see if CCU is idle. Maximum waiting period is 5minutes.Attempt to migrate overhead channels to another CCU within subcell.MRA notifies ECP of any emergency call; currently, technician cannot abort remove request.If migration fails, MRA sends warning to ECP.**MRA blocks CCU from receiving any calls.*
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-26 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-10. Remove Flow of BBA (Sheet 1 of 3)Remove BBA again and tag unit OOS-RMVD.Is BBAin growth state?Is BBAin OOS state?NoYesNoYesNoYesIs BBAunequipped?StartBBA is in active or standby state.1ToSheet 2Designated location has no unit installed.EndReturn completion-code message to technician.Reset BBA; BBA remains in growth state.Does BBAhave a mate?StandbyActiveYesNoAbort. Return error-code message to technician.32Is matein standby state?Mate is in standby state. NoToSheet 2 ToSheet 2YesIs BBAin active or standbystate?
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000 15-27Corrective Maintenance using MRAFigure 15-11. Remove Flow of BBA (Sheet 2 of 3)Is BBApart of subcell?Is removerequest conditional orunconditional?EndReturn completion-code message to technician.1FromSheet 1Abort. Return error-code message to technician.5Update equipment status table: BBA = OOS-RMVD.CondUncondToSheet 4Yes2 3FromSheet 1All BBAmates in subcell instandby state?YesNoNoYe sFromSheet 1Remove BBA (place unit out-of-service).Update equipment status table: BBA = OOS-RMVD, mate = active.Remove BBAs (place units out-of-service).Update equipment status table: BBAs = OOS-RMVD, mates = active.Remove BBA (place unit out-of-service).BBA is in standby state.Switch BBAs to standby & mates to active (execute a switch).Switch BBA to standby & mate to active (execute a switch).(future)If removed,is OOS thresholdexceeded?4ToSheet 3No
Lucent Technologies — ProprietarySee notice on first page15-28 401-660-100 Issue 11 August 2000

Navigation menu